STATISTICAL PROCESS

CONTROL
(SPC)

REFERENCE MANUAL

Second Edition, Issued July 2005

Issued 1992, Second Printing March 1995 (new cover only)
Copyright© 1992, © 1995, © 2005
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, Ford Motor Company, and General Motors Corporation
 STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL
SPC
FOREWORD to Second Edition
This Reference Manual was developed by the Statistical Process Control (SPC) Work Group, sanctioned
by the DaimlerChrysler/Ford/General Motors Supplier Quality Requirements Task Force, and under the
auspices of the American Society for Quality (ASQ) and the Automotive Industry Action Group (A!AG).
The Work Group responsible for this Second edition was prepared by the quality and supplier assessment
staffs at DaimlerChrysler Corporation, Delphi Corporation, Ford Motor Company, General Motors
Corporation, Omnex, Inc. and The Robert Bosch Corporation working in collaboration with the
Automotive Industry Action Group (Al.AG).

The Task Force charter is to standardize the reference manuals, reporting formats and technical
nomenclature used by Dain1lerChryslcr, Pord and General Motors in their respective supplier asscss111ent
systems. Accordingly, this Reference Manual can be used by any supplier to develop information
responding to the requirements of either DaimlerChrysler's, Ford's or General Motors' supplier
as~;essn1ent systems. 1'his second edition \\'as prepared to recognize the needs and changes \Vilhin 1he
auto1notjvc industry in SPC techniques that have evolved since the or'1ginal inanual \Vas published in
1991.

The manual is an introduction to statistical process control. It is not intended to limit evolution of SPC
methods suited to particular processes or commodities. While these guidelines arc intended to cover
normally occurring SPC system situations, there will be questions that arise. These questions should be
directed to your customer's Supplier Quality Assurance (SQA) activity. If you are uncertain as to how to
contact the appropriate SQA activity, the buyer in your customer's purchasing office can help.

The Task Force gratefully acknowledges: the leadership and commitment of Vice Presidents Peter
Rosenfeld at DaimlerChrysler Corporation, Thomas K. Brown at Ford Motor Company and Bo
Andersson of General Motors Corporation; the assistance of the Al.AG in the development, production
and distribution of the manual; the guidance of the Task Force principals Hank Gryn (DaimlerChrysler
Corporation), Russ Hopkins (Ford Motor Company), and Joe Bransky (General Motors Corporation).
l'herefore this n1anual \Vas developed to 111eet the specific needs of the auto1notivc industry.

This Manual is copyrighted by DaimlerChrysler Corporation, Ford Motor Company, and General Motors
Corporation, all rights reserved, 2005. Additional manuals can be ordered from A!AG and/or pern1ission
to copy portions of this manual for use within supplier organizations may be obtained from Al.AG at 248-
358-3570 or http://www.aiag.org.

Outside the lJSA manuals can be obtained from:

Adare Carwin Ltd, Unit 1, Trade Link, Western Ave, West Thurrock, Grays, Essex Rl\120 3FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1708 861333 Fax:+44 (0)1708 867941
Email: [email protected]/gs Website: www.adarecarwin.com/qs
11
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS to Second Edition
'fhe joint consensus on the contents of this docu1nent was effected through Task Tca1n Subcommittee
Members representing DaimlerChrysler, Ford, and General Motors, respectively, whose approval
signatures appear below, and who gratefully acknowledge the significant contribution of Gregory Gruska
of Omnex Inc., Gary A. Hiner of Delphi Corporation, and David W. Stamps of The Robert Bosch Corp.

The latest improvements were updating the fonnat to conform to the current AIAG/ ISO/ TS 16949:2002
documentation, more clarification and examples to make the manual more user friendly and additional
areas which where not included or did not exist when the original 1nanual was written.

The current re-write subcommittee is chaired by Mike Down from General Motors Corporation and
consists of Todd Kerkstra and Dave Benham from DaimlerChrysler Corporation, Peter Cvetkovski from
Ford Motor Company, Gregory Gruska, as a representative of the Omnex Inc. and ASQ, Gary A. Hiner of
Delphi Corporation, and David W. Stamps of The Robert Bosch Corp.

Michael H. Down Todd Kcrkstra

General Motors Corporation DaimkrChryslcr Corporation

Peter Cvetkuvski David R. Benhan1

Ford Motor Company Daimlcr(:hrysler Corporation

l11
Outside the USA manuals can he obtained from:
Adarc Carwin Ltd, Unit 1, Trade Link, Western Ave, West Thurrock, Grays, Essex RM20 3FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1708 861333 Fax:+44 (0)1708 867941
Email: gs9000(dladarecarwin.com/qs Website: www.adarecarwin.com/qs

IV
 STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL
SPC
FOREWORD to First Edition
This Reference Manual was prepared by the quality and supplier assessment staffs at Chrysler. Ford and
General Motors, working under the auspices of the Auto1notive Division of the Arnerican Society for Quality
Control Supplier Quality Requirements Task Force, in collaboration with the Automotive Industry Action
Group.

The ASQC/AIAG Task Force charter is to standardize the reference m:u1uals, reporting forn1ats and technical
nomenclature used by Chrysler, Ford and General Motors in their respective supplier assessment systems:
Supplier Quality Assurance, Total Quality Excellence and Targets for Excellence. Accordingly, this Reference
Manual can be used by any supplier to develop information responding to the requirements of either
Chrysler's, Ford's or General Motors' supplier assessment systen1s. Until now, there has been no unified
formal approach in the auto1notive industry on statistical process control. Certain tnanufacturers provided
1nethods for their suppliers, while others had no specific requiren1ents. In an effort to sin1plify and n1ini1nize
variation in supplier quality require1nents, Chrysler, Ford, and General Motors agreed to develop and, through
AJAG, distribute this n1anual. 'fhc 1.vork team rcsponsihlc for the Manual's content 1.vas led by Leonard A.
Brown of General Motors. 'I'he inanual should be considered an introduction to statistical process control. It is
not intended to limit evolution or statistical n1ethods suited to particular processes or co1nmodities nor is it
intended to be con1prehensive of all SPC~ techniques. Questions on the use of alternate methods should be
referred to your custo1ner's quaJity activity.

'fhe 'fask Force gratefully acknowledges: the senior leadership and co1nmitment of Vice Presidents 'J'hon1as 'I'.
Stallkamp at Chrysler. Clinton D. Lauer at Ford. and Donald A. Pais at General Motors; the technical
competence and hard work of their quality and supplier assessn1ent tea1ns; and the invaluable contdbutions of
the Automotive Industry Action Group (under AIAG Executive Director Joseph R. Phelan) in the
development, production and distribution of this Reference manual. We also wish to thank the ASQC reading
team led by Tripp Martin of Peterson Spring, who reviewed the Manual and in the process made valuable
contributions to intent and content.

Bruce W. Pince
'l'ask Force Coordinator
Sandy Corporation
Troy, Michigan
December, 199

This Manual is copyrighted by Chrysler Corporation, Ford Motor Company, General Motors Corporation.
all rights reserved, 1991. Additional copies can be ordered from A.LA.G., and/or pern1ission to copy portions
of the Manual for use within supplier organizations may be obtained from A.I.A.G. at (248) 358-3570.

v
VI
Vil
ACKN 0 WLEDG EMENTS to First Edition
rfhe joint consensus on the contents of this document was effected through Task Teatn Subco1n1nittee
Members representJng Genera1 Motors, Ford, and Chrysler, respectively, whose approval signatures appear
below, and who gratefully acknowledge the significant contribution of Pete Jessup of the Ford Motor
Company, who was responsible for developing the majority of the material found in Chapters I, II, and III, and
the Appendix of this document,

Harvey Goltzer of the Chrysler Corporation contributed concepts relative to process capability and capability
studies, found in the introduction section of Chapter L Jack Herman of Du Pont contributed some of the
concepts relative to capability and perforn1ance indices and the in1portance of n1easure1nen1 variability, found
in portions of Chapters ll and TV, respectively,

The General Motors Po\vertrain J)ivision contributed the discussion and examples relative to subgrouping and
process over-adjustn1ent. The section jn Chapter II which provides understanding of process capability and
related issues was developed by the General Motors Corporate Statistical Review Committee. This committee
also contributed to the development of Chapter IV, Process Measurement Systems Analysis, as well as to son1e
Appendix items.

Finally, valuable input to all sections of the manual was provided by ASQC representatives Gregory Gruska.
Doug Berg, and Tripp Martin.

Leonard A. Brown, Victor W. Lowe, Jr David R. Benham,

G.M, Ford Chrysler

viii
IX
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I .......................................................................................................................................... 1
Continual Improvement and Statistical Process Control ..................................................... ,. ............... 1
lmroduction ............. .............. . ...................................................................................... ...... 3
Six Points........................................... .................. . ................................... ................. 4
CHAPTER I - Section A ....................................................................................................................... 7
}"Jrevention Versus Detection ................................................................................................................ 7
CHAPTER I - Section B ....................................................................................................................... 9
A Process Control System .................................................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER I - Section C ..................................................................................................................... 13
Variation: Common ........................................................................................................................... 13
and Special Causes .......................................... ,. ................................................................................. 13
CHAPTER I - Section D ..................................................................................................................... 17
Local Actions And Actions On The System ....................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER I - Section E ..................................................................................................................... 19
Process Control and Process Capability .............................................................................................. 19
Control vs. Capahility........................................ .............. ........ . . . ............. ..... 19
Process Indices .......................................................................................................................... 21
CHAP1ER I - Section F ..................................................................................................................... 25
'l'hc Process ln1provc1ncnt Cycle and Process Control ........................................................................ 25
CHAPTER I - Section G ..................................................................................................................... 29
Control Charts: Tools For Process Control and Improvement ............................................................ 29
How do they work'................... ........................ ...................... . ....................... 30
Approach:..... ......... ......... .... . ......... .. . .... ... .. ... ........ ... .... . .................. 32
CHAPTER I - Section H ..................................................................................................................... 37
Effective Use and Benefits of Control Chaits ..................................................................................... 37
CHAPTER II ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Control Charts ................................................................................................................................... 41
Introduction: .. ... ........... ......... ..... ..... .. ............. ............. ........... 43
Variables Control Charts................................................. .................... ............ . ... 45
Attrihutes Control Charts. . ........ ... ,........ 47
Elements oj'Control Charts............................................. .................. ................. . ............ 48
CHAPTER II - Section A .................................................................................................................... 53
Control Chart Process ........................................................................................................................ 53
Preparatory Steps........................................... ............. .................. . ............................. 53
Control Chart Mechanics ......................... 55
Establish Control Limits .............................................................................................................. 59
Interpret for Statistical Control .................................................................................................... 60
Final Comments .......................................................................................................................... 63
Extend Control Limits for Ongoing Control ................................................................................ 65
CHAPTER II - Section B .................................................................................................................... 69
Defining "Out-of-Control" Signals ..................................................................................................... 69
JJoint Beyond a Control Litnit. ............ ..................... .. ........... ., .. 69
Patterns or Trends Within the Control Limits ................................................... 70
Special Cause Criteria.. ............................... ....................................................................... 75
Average Run Length (ARL). .............................. .. ..................................................................... 76
CHAPTER II - Section C .................................................................................................................... 79
Control Chart Formulas ...................................................................................................................... 79

x
 Variahles Control Charts............. ........................ ................. .............. .. ............................. 79
Average and Range Charts ( X, R) ......................................................................................... 79
Average and Standard Deviation Charts ( X, S) ....................................................................... 83
Median and Range Charts ( ffr; R) ............................................................................................ 85
Individuals and Moving Range Charts ( X, MR) ..................................................................... 87
Attrihutes Control Charts .................. .......................................................................................... 89
Control Charts for Nonconforming Items .................................................................................... 89
Proportion Nonconfonning (p Chart) ........................................................................................... 89
Number of Nonconforming Chart (np Chart) ............................................................................... 93
Number ofNonconfonnities per Unit Chart (u Chart) .................................................................. 95
Number of Nonconformities Chart (c Chart) ................................................................................ 97
CHAPTER III ..................................................................................................................................... 99
Other Types of Control Charts ........................................................................................................... 99
Introduction.................... ..................... .. ............................................. ...................... 101
Pmhahility Based Charts... .................... .................. .. ................................... 101
Short-Run Contml Charts. ............. ............ . 107
Chartsj(Jr Detecting Small Changes.. ............... ..................... .109
Non-Normal Charts.. 113
Multivariate... ................ ................. ................... . J 16
Other Charts.............. ............. .............. ............. .. ...................... .. 117
Regression Control Charts ......................................................................................................... 117
Residual Charts ......................................................................................................................... 118
Autoregressive Charts ............................................................................................................... 118
Zone Charts .............................................................................................................................. 121
CHAPTER IV .................................................................................................................................... 125
Understanding Process Capability .................................................................................................... 125
and Process Performance for Variables Data .................................................................................... 125
Introduction..... .. ..................................................................................................... ..... 127
CHAPTER IV - Section A ................................................................................................................. 131
Definitions of Process Terms......................... . .......... 131
Process Measures for Predictable Processes ..................................................................................... 132
Indices - Bilateral Tolerances...... ........................ .. ................................... 132
indices- Unilateral Tolerances................................................... . ..................................... 137
CHAPTER IV - Section B ................................................................................................................. 139
Description of Conditions ................................................................................................................ 139
Handling Non-Normal and Multivariate Distributions ...................................................................... 140
Relationship of'Indiccs and Proportion Noncunj(mning .. ........................................................ .. 140
Non-Normal Distributions Using Transfrmnations.......... .................. .. ..................... .. 140
Non-Normal Disf!·ihutions Using Non-Normal Forms ................... .. ..................... .. 142
Multivariate Distributions.................................... ................................................... ...... 144
CHAPTER IV - Section C ................................................................................................................. 147
Suggested Use of Process Measures ................................................................................................. 147
The Loss Function Concept. . ..................... .............. . ...... 148
Alignment qf Process to Custo1ner Requirernents ... ........................... ............................... 153
APPENDIX A .................................................................................................................................... 157
Some Comments on Sampling ......................................................................................................... 157
Eff('cts ofSuhgrouping......................................... ........................ .. ............................ ..... 157

Xl
 Autocorrelated Data....................... .... ........ ..... .............. . 157
Multiple Stream Process Example .. ................. ...... ............... . 162
Effects ofSamplf Size on Indices.... ................. ............ ................. .. .... 168
APPENDIX B .................................................................................................................................... 171
Some Comments on Special Causes .............. ., ................................................................................. 171
Over-Adjustment..................................................... ..................... 171
Time Dependent Processes......... ... ................. .... ........ .. ... 173
Repeating Patterns.................................................. ..................... ................... .. .. 175
APPENDIX C .................................................................................................................................... 177
Selection Procedure for the Use of the Control Charts Described in This Manual ............................. 177
APPENDIX D .................................................................................................................................... 179
Relationship Between Cpm and Other Indices .................................................................................... 179
APPENDIX E .................................................................................................................................... 181
Table of Constants and Formulas for Control Charts ........................................................................ 181
APPENDIX F .................................................................................................................................... 185
Capability Index Calculations Example ............................................................................................ 185
Data Set: ....... .. .. ............. .............. .......... ........ ... ....... ............................................................ .. .......... 186
Analysis ........................................................................................................................................... 187
Dian1eter Statistics: , ......................................... ., ....... ,.,... . .. ., .. .,................. .. 188
Conclusion: .............................................................................................................................. 190
APPENDIX G .............................................................................................. .., ................................... 191
Glossary of Terms and Symbols ....................................................................................................... 191
Terms Used in This Manua/ .......................................................................................................... 191
Symhols as Used in This Manual ........................................................................................... ..... 204
APPENDIX H .................................................................................................................................... 211
References and Suggested Readings ................................................................................................. 211
APPENDIX I ..................................................................................................................................... 215
Standard Normal Tables ................................................................................................................... 215
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................... 217
S.P.C. Manual User Feedback Process ............................................................................................. 221

xii
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1.1: A Process Control System ...................................................................................................... 8
Figure 1.2: Variation: Common Cause and Special Cause ....................................................................... 12
Figure 1.3: Process Control and Process Capability ................................................................................ 18
Figure 1.4: The Process Improvement Cycle .......................................................................................... 24
Figure 1.5: Control Charts ...................................................................................................................... 28
l'igure II.I: Variables Data .................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 11.2: Attributes Data .................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 11.3: Elements of Control Charts ................................................................................................. 49
l'igure ll.4a: Sample Control Chart (l'ront side) .................................................................................... 51
rigure Il.4b: Sample Control Chart (back side) - Event Log .................................................................. 52
l'igure 11.5: Extending Control Limits .................................................................................................... 56
Figure 11.6: Control Limits Recalculation ............................................................................................... 61
Figure 11.7: Extend Control Limits for Ongoing Control ........................................................................ 64
Figure 11.8: Process Variation Relative to Specification Limits .............................................................. 67
Figure II. 9: Points Beyond Control Limits ............................................................................................. 70
Figure 11.10: Runs in an Average Control Chart ..................................................................................... 71
Figure 11.11: Runs in a Range Control Chart .......................................................................................... 72
Figure 11.12: Nonrandom Patterns in a Control Chart ............................................................................. 74
Figure ll.13: Average and Range Charts ................................................................................................ 78
Figure IL 14: Average and Standard Deviation (J1arts .......... , ... 82
Figure ll.15: Median and Range Charts ................................................................................................. 84
Figure 11.16: Individual and Moving Range Charts ................................................................................ 86
Figure 11.17: Proportion Nonconforming Chart ...................................................................................... 88
Figure Il.18: Number of Nonconforming Chart ...................................................................................... 92
Figure ll.19: Number of Nonconforming per Unit Chart ........................................................................ 94
Figure ll.20: Number of Nonconformities Chart .................................................................................... 96
Figure Ill. I : Control Charts ................................................................................................................. 100
Figure III.2: Stoplight Control ............................................................................................................. 102
Figure 111.3: Pre-Control ...................................................................................................................... 105
Figure lll.4: DNOM Control Chart ...................................................................................................... l 08
Figure IIl.5: CUSUM Chart with V-Mask ............................................................................................ 109
Figure III.6: X. MR Chart ..................................................................................................................... 110
Figure Ill.7: EWMA Chart of Viscosity ............................................................................................... 112
Figure III.8: X. MR Chart of Viscosity ................................................................................................ 112
Figure IV. I: Within- and Between-Subgroup Variation ....................................................................... 130
Figure IV.2: C,,, and P,,,
Comparison .................................................................................................... 133
Figure IV.3: Comparison between a Predictable and Immature Process ................................................ 135
Figure IV.4: Cpk and Ppk Values Produced hy a Predictable and Immature Process ............................. 136
Figure IV.5: "Goal Post'" vs. Loss Function ......................................................................................... 148
Figure IV.6: Comparison of Loss Function and Specifications ............................................................. 150
Figure lV.7: Comparison of Loss Functions ......................................................................................... 151
Figure IV.8: A Process Control System ............................................................................................... 152
Figure IV.9: Process Alignment to Requirements ................................................................................. 154

xiii
 CHAPTER I

Continual Improvement
and
Statistical Process Control
This page intentionally left blank

2
 CHAJYl'ER I
Continual lmprovernent and Statistical Pruces::. Control

Introduction
'To prosper in today's economic climate, we - automotive manufacturers,
suppliers and dealer organizations - must be dedicated to continual
improvement. We must constantly seek more efficient ways to produce
products and services. These products and services n1ust continue to
improve in value. We must focus upon our custon1ers, both internal and
external. and make customer satisfaction a primary business goal.
To accomplish this, everyone in our organizations must be com1nitted to
improvc1ncnt and to the use of effective methods. '!'his manual describes
several basic statistical methods that can be used to make our efforts at
improvement more effective. Different levels of understanding are
needed to perform different tasks. This manual is aimed at practitioners
and managers beginning the application of statistical methods. It will
also serve as a refresher on these basic methods for those who are no\V
using more advanced techniques. Not all basic methods are included
here. Coverage of other basic methods (such as check sheets, flowcharts,
Pareto charts, cause and effect diagrams) and some advanced methods
(such as other control charts, designed experiments, quality function
deployment, etc.) is available in books and booklets such as those
referenced in Appendix H.
The basic statistical methods addressed in this manual include those
associated with statistical process control and process capability analysis.
Chapter I provides background for process control, explains several
in1portant concepts such as special and con11non causes of variation. It
also introduces the control chart, which can be a very effective tool for
analyzing and 111onitoring processes.
Chapter II describes the construction and use of control charts for both
variables 1 data and attributes data.
Chapter Ill describes other types of control charts that can be used for
specialized situations - probability based charts, short-run charts. charts
for detecting small changes, non-nonnaL multivariate and other charts.
Chapter IV addresses process capability analysis.
The Appendices address sampling, over-adjustment. a process for
selecting control charts, table of constants and formulae, the normal
table, a glossary of terms and symbols, and references.

The term "Variables", although awkward sounding. is used in order to distinguish the difference
between something that varies, and the control chart used for data taken from a continuous variable.

3
CHAPTER I
Conlinual In1provcmcnt and Statistical Process Control

Six Points
Six points should be made before the main discussion begins:

I) Gathering data and using statistical methods to interpret them are not
ends in themselves. The overall mm should be increased
understanding of the reader's processes. It is very easy to become
technique experts without realizing any improvements. Increased
knowledge should become a basis for action.
2) Measurement systems are critical to proper data analysis and they
should be well understood before process data are collected. When
such systems lack statistical control or their variation accounts for a
substantial portion of the total variation m process data,
inappropriate decisions may be made. For the purposes of this
manual, it will be assumed that this system is under control and is
not a significant contributor to total variation in the data. The reader
is referred to the Measurement Systems Analysis (MSA) Manual
available from AlAG for more information on this topic.
3) The basic concept of studying variation and using statistical signals
to in1prove perfornKu1ce can be applied to any urea. Such areas can
be on the shop lloor or in the office. Some examples are machines
(perfonnance characteristics), bookkeeping (error rates), gross sales,
waste analysis (scrap rates), computer systems (performance
characteristics) and n1aterials manage1nent (transit times). This
manual focuses upon shop floor applications. The reader is
encouraged to consult the references 111 Appendix H for
administrative and service applications.
4) SPC stands for Statistical Process Control. Historically, statistical
methods have been routinely applied to parts, rather than processes.
Application of statistical techniques to control output (such as parts)
should be only the first step. Until the processes that generate the
output become the focus of our efforts, the full power of these
methods to improve quality, increase productivity and reduce cost
may not be fully realized.
5) Although each point in the text is illustrated with a worked-out
example, real understanding of the subject involves deeper contact
with process control situations. The study of actual cases from the
reader's own job location or from sin1ilar activities would be an
in1portant supp lenient to the text. 'l'here is no substitute for hands-on
experience.
6) This manual should be considered a first step toward the use of
statistical methods. 1t provides generally accepted approaches,
which work in 111any instances. llowever, there exist exceptions
where it is improper to blindly use these approaches. This manual
does not replace the need for practitioners to increase their
knowledge of statistical methods and theory. Readers are
encouraged to pursue formal statistical education. Where the
reader's processes and application of statistical methods have

4
 CHAPTER I
Continual ln1prove1nent and Statistical Process Control

advanced beyond the material covered here, the reader is also

encouraged to consult with persons who have the proper knowledge
and practice in statistical theory as to the appropriateness of other
techniques. In any event, the procedures used must satisfy the
customer's requirements.

s
CllAPTER I~ Section A
Prevention Versus Detection

THE NEED FOR

PROCESS CONTROL
Detection - Tolerates Waste

Prevention - Avoids Waste

6
 CHAPTER J - Section A
Prevention Versus Detection

CHAPTER I - Section A
Prevention Versus Detection
Jn the past, Manufacturing often depended on Production to make the
product and on Quality Control to inspect the final product and screen
out items not meeting specifications. In adtninistrative situations, work
is often checked and rechecked in efforts to catch errors, Both cases
involve a strategy of detection, which is wasteful, because it allows time
and materials to be invested in products or services that are not always
usable.
It is much more effective to avoid waste by not producing unusable
output in the first place - a strategy of prevention.
A prevention strategy sounds sensible - even obvious - to most people.
It is easily captured in such slogans as, "Do it right the first time".
However, slogans are not enough. What is required is an understanding
of the elements of a statistical process control system. The remaining
seven subsections of this introduction cover these elements and can be
vievved as answers to the following questions:
• What is meant by a process control system?
• How does variation affect process output?
• How can statistical techniques tell whether a problem is local in
nature or involves broader systetns?
• What is meant by a process being in statistical control?
What is meant by a process being capable?
• What is a continual improvement cycle, and what part can process
control play in it?
• What are control charts, and how are they used?
• What benefits can be expected from using control charts?

As this material is being studied, the reader may wish to refer to the
Glossary in Appendix G for brief definitions of key tcm1s and symbols.

7
CHAPTER I - Section B
A Process Control Systen1

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MODEL

WITH FEEDBACK

VOICE
OF THE
PROCESS

STATISTICAL
METHODS

PEOPLE~
I
EQUIPMENT~

v'- - - - - -'
.. THE WAY
PRODUCT!\
MATERIAL~ WE WORK/
OR CUSTOMERS
,.. METHODS~ BLENDING OF
MEASUREMENT~ RESOURCES SERVICES
ENVIRONMENT~~--------------

......
INPUTS
......
PROCESS/SYSTEM
......
OUTPUTS
IDENTIFYING
CHANGING NEEDS
AND EXPECTATIONS

VOICE
OF THE
CUSTOMER

Figure 1.1 : A Process Control System

8
 Cl-IAPTER J ~ Section B
A Process Control System

CHAPTER I - Section B
A Process Control System
A process control system can be described as a feedback system. SPC is
one type of feedback system. Other such systems, which are not
statistical, also exist. Four elements of that system are important to the
discussions that will follow:
I. The Process - By the process, we mean the whole combination of
suppliers, producers, people, equipment, input materials, methods, and
environment that work together to produce output, and the customers
who use that output (see figure I. I). The total performance of the
process depends upon com1nunication between supplier and custon1er,
the way the process is designed and implemented, and on the way it is
operated and managed. The rest of the process control system is nseful
only if it contributes either to maintaining a level of excellence or to
improving the total performance of the process.
2. Information About Performance - Much information about the
actual performance of the process can be learned by studying the process
output. ]'he n1ost helpful infon11ation about the pcrfonnance of a process
con1es, however, frotn understanding the process itself and its internal
variability. Process characteristics (such as temperatures, cycle times,
feed rates, absenteeism, turnover, tardiness, or number of interruptions)
should be the ultimate focus of our efforts. We need to determine the
target values for those characteristics that result in the most productive
operation of the process, and then tnonitor how near to or far frotn those
target values we are. If this information is gathered and interpreted
correctly, it can show whether the process is acting in a usual or unusual
manner. Proper actions can then he taken, if needed, to correct the
process or the just-produced output. When action is needed it must be
timely and appropriate, or the information-gathering effort is wasted.
3. Action on the Process - Action on the process is frequently most
economicaJ when taken to prevent the important characteristics (process
or output) from varying too far from their target values. This ensures the
stability and the variation of the process output is maintained within
acceptable limits. Such action 1night consist of:
• Changes in the operations
operator training
changes to the inco1ning materials
• Changes in the more basic elements of the process itself
the equipment
how people communicate and relate
the design of the process as a whole - which may be vulnerable
to changes in shop te1npcrature or humidity
The effect of actions should be monitored, with further analysis and
action taken if necessary.

9
CB APTER J - Section B

A Process Control Systen1

4. Action on the Output - Action on the output is frequently least

economical when it is restricted to detecting and correcting out-of-
specification product without addressing the underlying process problem.
Unfortunately, if current output does not consistently meet customer
require1nents, it 1nay be necessary to sort all products and to scrap or
rework any nonconforming items. This must continue until the
necessary corrective action on the process has been taken and verified.
It is obvious that inspection followed by action on only the output is a
poor substitute for effective process management. Action on only the
output should be used strictly as an interim measure for unstable or
incapable processes (sec Chapter I, Section E). Therefore, the
discussions that follow focus on gathering process infonnation and
analyzing it so that action can be taken to correct the process itself.
Remember, the focus should be on prevention not detection.

10
 CHAPTER l ~Section B
A Process Control System

This page intentionally left blank

11
CHAPTER I - Section C
Variation: Con1rnon and Special Causes

I PIECES v ARY FROM EACH OTHER

_L -1n_ _lrn_
SIZE----+ SIZE _ _ _.. SIZE----+
~SIZE---+

BUT THEY FORM A PATTERN THAT, IF STABLE, CAN BE DESCRIBED AS A DISTRIBUTION

""
-
' ' ' '
SIZE

DISTRIBUTION CAN DIFFER IN•

LOCATION SPREAD

SIZE---+

IF ONLY COMMON CAUSES OF VARIATION

...
1:\ f-1
ARE PRESENT, THE OUTPUT OF A PROCESS I :I \ 1~>'G
..........
FORMS A DISTRIBUTION THAT IS ST ABLE OVER
TIME AND IS PREDICT ABLE: I : \.--'-' ,_11'1€.
-~----....~-----~-­
PREDICTION

IF SPECIAL CAUSES OF VARIATION ARE

PRESENT, THE PROCESS OUTPUT IS NOT
STABLE OVER TIME:

UNABLE TO
PREDICT

Figure 1.2: Variation: Common Cause and Special Cause

12
 CHAPTER I - SeL·tion C
Variation: Common and Special Causes

CHAPTER I - Section C
Variation: Common and Special Causes
111 order to effectively use process control 1ncasurcment data, it is
important to understand the concept of variation, as illustrated in Figure
1.2.
No two products or characteristics arc exactly alike, because any process
contains n1any sources of variability. The differences an1ong products
may be large. or they may be immeasurably small. but they are always
present. The diameter of a machined shaft, for instance, would he
susceptible to potential variation fron1 the 1nachinc (clearances, bearing
wear), tool (strength, rate of wear), material (diameter, hardness),
operator (part feed, accuracy of centering), maintenance (lubrication,
replacetnent of worn parts), environment (temperature, constancy of
power supply) and measurement system. Another example is the time
required to process an invoice could vary according to the people
performing various steps, the reliability of any equipment they were
using, the accuracy and legibility of the invoice itself, the procedures
followed, and the volume of other work in the office.
Son1e source,\ of variation in lhe proce~.-. cause shorl-ierrn, piecc-10-piecc
differences, e.g., backlash and clearances within a machine and its
fixturing, or the accuracy of a bookkeeper's work. Other sources of
variation tend to cause changes in the output only over a longer period of
time. These changes may occur either gradually as with tool or machine
wear, stepwise as with procedural changes, or irregularly as with
environn1cntal changes such as power surges. Therefore, the tjme period
and conditions over which measurements are made are critical since they
will affect the amount of the total variation that will be observed.
While individual measured values may all be different, as a group they
tend to form a pattern that can be described as a distribution (see f'igure
1.2). This distribution can be characterized by:
• Location (typical or "central" value)
• Spread (span or "width" of values from smallest to largest)
• Shape (the pattern of variation - whether it is symmetrical, skewed,
etc.)
From the standpoint of minimu1n require1nents, the issue of variation is
often si1nplified: parts within specification tolerances are acceptable,
parts beyond specification tolerances are not acceptable; reports on tirne
are acceptable, late reports are not acceptable. Hovvever, the goal should
he to maintah1 the location to a target value 111ith minirnal variability. To
1nanage any process and reduce variation, the variation should be traced
back to its sources. The first step is to make the distinction between
common and special causes of variation.
Con7n1on causes refer to the many sources of variation that consistently
acting on the process. Cotnmon causes within a process produce a stable
and repeatable distribution over time. This is called "in a state of

13
CHA.PTER I - Section C
Variation: Com1non and Special Causes

statistical control," "in statistical control," or someti1nes just "in control."

Common causes yield a stable system of chance causes. If only common
causes of variation are present and do not change, the output of a process
is predictable.
Special causes (often called assignable causes) refer to any factors
causing variation that affect only some of the process output. They arc
alien intermittent and unpredictable. Special causes arc signaled by one
or more points beyond the control limits or non-random patterns of
points within the control limits. Unless all the special causes of variation
are identified and acted upon, they may continue to affect the process
output in unpredictable ways. If special causes of variation arc present,
the process output will not be stable over time.
The changes in the process distribution due to special causes can be
either detrimental or beneficial. When detrimental, they need to be
understood and removed. When beneficial, they should be understood
and n1ade a permanent part of the process. With some mature processes 2 ,
the custo1ner tnay give special allowance to run a process V..'ith a
consistently occurring special cause. Such allowances will usually
require that the process control plans can assure conformance to
custo1ncr requirc1ncnts and protect the process from other special causes
(see Chapter I, Section E).

2
Processes that have undergone several cycles of continual improve1nent.

14
 CHAPTER I ~ Section C
Variation: Cornrnon and Special Causes

This page intentionally left blank

15
CHAPTER 1- Section D
Local Aclions And Actions On The Systc1n

-- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

LOCAL ACTIONS AND ACTIONS ON THE SYSTEM

Local Actions
• Are usually required to eliminate special causes of variation
• Can usually be taken by people close to the process
• Can correct typically about 15% of process problems

Actions on the System

• Are usually required to reduce the variation due to common causes
• Almost always require management action for correction
• Are needed to correct typically about 85% of process problems

16
 CHAPTER I - Section D
Local Actions And Actions On The Syslc1n

CHAPTER I - Section D
Local Actions And Actions On The System
There is an itnportant connection between the two types of variation just
discussed and the types of action necessary to reduce thcm 3
Simple statistical process control techniques can detect special causes of
variation. Discovering a special cause of variation and taking the proper
action is usually the responsibility of someone who is directly connected
with the operation. Although management can sometimes be involved to
correct the condition, the resolution of a special cause of variation
usually requires local action. i.e .. by people directly connected with the
operation. This is especially true during the early process improvement
efforts. As one succeeds in taking the proper action on special causes,
those that remain will often require management action, rather than local
action.
These san1e sin1ple statistical techniques can also indicate the extent of
co1nn1on causes of variation, but the causes themselves need tnore
detailed analysis to isolate. The correction of these con1mon causes of
variation is usually the responsibility of manage1nent. Sometimes people
directly connected with the operation will be in a better position to
identify them and pass them on to management for action. Overall, the
resolution of comn1on causes of variation usually requires action on the
system.
Only a relatively sn1all proportion of excessive process variation -
industrial experience suggests about 15% - is correctable locally by
people directly connected with the operation. The majority - the other
85% - is correctable only by management action on the system.
Confusion about the type of action to take is very costly to the
organization, in terms of wasted effort, delayed resolution of trouble, and
aggravating problems. It tnay be wrong, for exa1nple, to take local action
(e.g., adjusting a machine) when 1nanagement action on the syste1n is
required (e.g., selecting suppliers that provide consistent input
tnaterials). 4 Nevertheless, close teamwork between n1anagemcnt and
those persons directly connected with the operation is a must for
enhancing reduction of co1nmon causes of process variation.

Dr. W. E. Deming has treated this issue in many articles; e.g., see Deming (l 967).
4
These observations were first made by Dr. J. M. Juran, and have been borne out in Dr. Deming's
experience.

17
CHAPTER I - Section E
Process Control and Process Capability

PROCESS CONTROL

IN CONTROL
(SPECIAL CAUSE ELIMINATED)

/
SIZE__.,.

OUT OF CONTROL
(SPECIAL CAUSES PRESENT)

PROCESS CAPABILITY _,/

_...;.:.'....="""-'---7,!.------"'-:://1~:~::~~L
;;;~;;;;;' O;~~~~~~G
AND

-----~,::.;._.r . . . . . .~-----:::::·,,;,.- SPECIFICATIONS

(VARIATION FROM COMMON
CAUSES
HAS BEEN REDUCED)

IN CONTROL BUT NOT CAPABLE

OF MEETING SPECIFICATIONS
(VARIATION FROM COMMON CAUSES
IS EXCESSIVE)

--------------- - - -

Figure 1.3: Process Control and Process Capability

18
 CHAPTER 1-- Section E
Process Control and Process Capability

CHAPTER I - Section E
Process Control and Process Capability
The process control system is an integral part of the overall business
management systcm. 5 As such, the goal of the process control system is
to make predictions about the cuffent and future state of the process. This
leads to economically sound decisions about actions affecting the
process. These decisions require balancing the risk of taking action when
action is not necessary (over-control or "tan1pering") versus failing to
take action when action is necessary (under-control) 6 These risks should
be handled, however, in the context of the two sources of variation -
special causes and common causes (see Figure 1.3).
A process is said to be operating in statistical control when the only
sources of variation are cornn1on causes. One function of a process
control system, then, is to provide a statistical signal when special causes
of variation are present, and to avoid giving false signals when they arc
not present. This allows appropriate action(s) to be taken upon those
special causes (either removing them or, if they are beneficial, making
them permanent).
]'he process control systcn1 can be used as a one-tin1e evaluation tool but
the real benefit of a process control system is realized when it is used as
a continual learning tool instead of a conformance tool (good/bad,
stable/not stable, capable/not capable, etc.)

Control vs. Capability

When discussing process capability, t\VO sotnewhat contrasting concepts
need to be considered:
• Process capability
• Process pcrfonnance
Process capability is determined by the variation that comes from
common causes. It generally represents the best performance of the
process itself. This is de1nonstrated when the process is being operated
in a state of statistical control regardless of the specifications.
Customers, internal or external, are however more typically concerned
with the process performance: that is, the overall output of the process
and how it relates to their requirements (defined by specifications),
irrespective of the process variation.

5
See TS 16949.
6
See W. E. Deming, (l 994 ), and W. Shewhart, (1931 ).

19
CHAPTER 1- Section E
Process Control and Process Capahihty

In general, since a process in statistical control can be described by a

predictable distribution, the proportion of in-specification parts can be
cstitnated from this distribution. As long as the process reinains in
statistical control and does not undergo a change in location, spread or
shape, it will continue to produce the same distribution of in-·
specification parts.
Once the process is in statistical control the first action on the process
should be to locate the process on the target. If the process spread is
unacceptable, this strategy allows the minimum number of out-of-
specification parts to be produced. Actions on the system to reduce the
variation from common causes are usually required to improve the ability
of the process (and its output) to meet specifications consistently. For a
more detailed discussion of process capability, process performance and
the associated assumptions, refer to Chapter IV.

The process must first be brought into statistical control by detecting and
acting upon special causes of variation. Then its performance is
predictable, and its capability to meet customer expectations can be
assessed. This is a basis for continual improvement.

Every process is subject to classification based on capability and control.

A process can be classified into I or 4 cases, as illustrated by the
following chart:

Statistical Control
In-Control Out-of-Control

Acceptable Case 1 Case 3

Capability
Unacceptable Case 2 Case 4

To be acceptable, the process must be in a state of statistical control and

the capability (common cause variation) must be less than the tolerance,
The ideal situation is to have a Case I process where the process is in
statistical conLrol and the ability to meet tolerance requiren1ents is
acceptable. A Case 2 process is in control but has excessive common
cause variation, which 1nust be reduced. A Case 3 process meets
tolerance requircn1ents but is not in statit-Jtical control; special causes of
variation should be identified and acted upon. In Case 4, the process is
not in control nor is it acceptable. Both con1mon and special cause
variation must be reduced.
Under certain circun1stances, the cuslorner inay allow a producer to run a
process even though it is a Case 3 process. These circumstances may
include:
• T'he customer is insensitive to variation within specifications (see
discussion on the loss function in Chapter IV).

20
 CHAPTER I - Section E
Process ConLrol and Process Capability

• 'l'he econo1nics involved in acting upon the special cause exceed the
benefit to any and all customers. Economically allowable special
causes may include tool wear, tool regrind, cyclical (.seasonal)
variation, etc.
• The special cause has been identified and has been documented as
consislenl and predictable.
In these situations. lhc customer may require the following:
• The process is mature.
• The special cause to be allowed has been shown to act in a consistent
manner over a known period of ti1ne.
• A process control plan is in effect which will assure conformance to
specification of all process output and protection from olhcr special
causes or inconsistency in the allowed special cause.
Sec also Appendix A for a discussion on Lime dependent processes.
Process Indices
'fhe accepted practice in the automotive industry is to calculate the
capability (common cause variation) only after a process has been
dc111onstrated to be in a state of statistical control. 'I'hesc results arc used
as a basis for prediction of how lhe process will perfom1. There is little
value in making predictions based on data collected from a process that
is not stable and not repeatable over time. Special causes are responsible
for changes in the shape, spread, or location of a process distribution, and
thus can rapidly invalidate prediction about the process. That is, in
order for the various process indices and ratios to he used as
predictive tools, the requirement is that the data used to calculate
them are gathered from processes that are in a state of statistical
control.
Process indices can be divided into two categories: those that are
calculated using within-subgroup estimates of variation and those using
total variation when estimating a given index (see also chapter IV).
Several different indices have been developed because:
l) No single index can be universally applied to all processes. and
2) No given process can be completely described by a single index.
For example, it is recommended that Cl' and c,,
both be used (see
Chapter IV), and further that they be combined with graphical techniques
to better understand the relationship between the estimated distribution
and the specification limits. In one sense, this amounts to comparing (and
trying to align) the "voice of the process" with the "voice of the
customer" (see also Sherkenbach ( 199 I)).
All indices have weaknesses and can be misleading. Any inferences
drawn from computed indices should be driven by appropriate
interpretation of the data from which the indices were computed.

21
CHAPTER I - Section E
Process Control and Process C<tpahility

Automotive companies have set requirements for process capability. It is

the reader's responsibility to communicate with their customer and
detertnine which indices to use. In some cases, it might be best to use no
index at all. It is important to remember that most capability indices
include the product specification in the fonnula. If the specification is
inappropriate, or not based upon customer requirements, much time and
effort may be wasted in trying to force the process to conform. Chapter
IV deals with selected capability and performance indices and contains
advice on the application of those indices.

22
 CHAPTER I - Section E
Process Control and Process Capability

This page intentionally left blank

23
 CHAPTER I - Section F
The Process hnproven1ent Cycle and Process Control

STAGES OF THE CONTINUAL PROCESS IMPROVEMENT CYCLE

1. ANALYZE THE PROCESS 2. MAINTAIN THE PROCESS

What should the process be doing? ·· Monitor process performance
- What can go wrong? - Detect special cause
- What is the process doing? variation and act upon it.
- Achieve a state of statistical control.
- Determine capability

PLAN DO

1 2
ACT STUDY ACT STUDY

3 3. IMPROVE THE PROCESS

ACT - Change the process to better

STUDY
understand common cause
variation.
- Reduce common cause
variation.

Figure 1.4: The Process Improvement Cycle

24
 CHAPTER 1 - Section F
The Process lmprovemenl Cycle and Process Control

CHAPTER I - Section F
The Process Improvement Cycle and Process Control
In applying the concept of continual improvement to processes, there is a
three-stage cycle that can be useful (see Figure l.4). Every process is in
one of the three stages of the Improvement Cycle.

1. Analyze the Process

A basic understanding of the process is a must when considering process
improve1nent. Among the questions to be answered in order to achieve a
better understanding of the process are:
• What should the process be doing''
What is expected at each step of tbe process?
What are the operational definitions of the deliverables?
• What can go wrong?
What can vary in this process?
What do we already know about this process' variability''
What paraineters are 1nost sensitive 10 variation?
• What is the process doing?
ls this process producing scrap or output that requires rework?
Does this process produce output that is in a state of statistical
control?
ls the process capable?
Is the process reliable''

Many techniques discussed in the APQP Manual' may be applied to gain

a better understanding of the process. These activities include:
• Group meetings
• Consultation with people who develop or operate the process
("subject matter experts")
• Review of the process' history
• Construction of a Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA)
Control charts explained in this manual are powerful tools that should he
used during the Process Improvement Cycle. These simple statistical
methods help differentiate between common and special causes of
variation. rrhe special causes of variation rnust be addressed. When a
state of statisticaJ control has been reached, the process' current level of
long-term capability can be assessed (see Chapter IV).

7
Chrysler, Ford, and General Motors, (1995).

25
CHAPTER I ~Section F
The Process Jmprove1nent Cycle and Process Control

2. Maintain (Control) the Process

Once a better understanding of the process has been achieved, the
process must be maintained at an appropriate level of capability.
Processes are dynamic and will change. The performance of the process
should be monitored so effective measures to prevent undesirable change
can be taken. Desirable change also should be understood and
institutionalized. Again, the simple statistical methods explained in this
manual can assist. Construction and use of control charts and other tools
will allow for efficient monitoring of the process. When the tool signals
that the process has changed, quick and efficient measures can be taken
to isolate the cause(s) and act upon them.
It is too easy to stop at this stage of the Process Improvement Cycle. It is
important to realize that there is a limit to any company's resources.
Some, perhaps many, processes should be at this stage. However, failure
to proceed to the next stage in this cycle can result in a significant
cotnpetitive disadvantage. 1'he attainment of "world class" requires a
steady and planned effort to move into the next stage of the Cycle.

3. Improve the Process

l.Jp to this point. the effort has been to stabilize the processes and
maintain the1n. However, for some processes, the customer \vill be
sensitive even to variation within engineering specifications (sec Chapter
IV). In these instances, the value of continual improvement \vill not be
realized until variation is reduced. At this point, additional process
analysis tools, including more advanced statistical tnethods such as
designed experiments and advanced control charts may be useful.
Appendix H lists some helpful references for further study.
Process improve1nent through variation reduction typically involves
purposefully introducing changes into the process and measuring the
effects. The goal is a better understanding of the process, so that the
common cause variation can be further reduced. The intent of this
reduction is in1proved quality at lower cosL
When new process parameters have been detennined, the Cycle shifts
back to Analyze the Process. Since changes have been made, process
stability will need to be reconfirmed. The process then continues to
1nove around the Process ln1provemcnt Cycle.

26
 CJ-iAPTER I - Section F
The Process lmprovc1nent Cycle and Process Control

This page intentionally !ell blank

27
CHAPTER I - Section G
Control Chans: Tools For Process Control and Itnprovcn1cnt

CONTROL CHARTS

Upper Control Limit

Center Line

Lower Control Limit

1. Collection
• Gather Data and plot on a chart.
2. Control
• Calculate trial control limits from process data.
• Identify special causes of variation and act upon them.
3. Analysis and Improvement
• Quantify common cause variation; take action to reduce it.

These three phases are repeated for continual process improvement

Figure 1.5: Control Charts

28
 CHAPTER I - Seclion G
Control Charts: Tools For Proces~ Control and linrrove111enl

CHAPTER I - Section G
Control Charts:
Tools For Process Control and Improvement
In his books 8 , Dr, W, E. Deming identifies two mistakes frequently made
in process control:
"Mistake 1. Ascribe a variation or a mistake to a special cause,
when in fact the cause belongs to the system (common causes).
Mistake 2. Ascribe a variation or a mistake to a system (common
causes), when in fact the cause was special.
Over adjustment [tamperini; I is a common example of mistake
No. 1. Never doing anything to try to find a special cause is a
common example of mistake No.2."

For effectjvc variation inanagement during production, there 1nust be an

effective means of detecting special causes. There is a comn1on
rnisconception that histogran1s can be used for this purpose. Histogra1ns
arc the graphical representation of the distributional fonn of the process
variation. The distributional form is studied to verify that the process
variation is sym111etric and unimodal and that it follows a nonnal
distribution.

Unfortunately normality does not guarantee that there are no special

causes acting on the process. That is, some special causes may change
the process without destroying its symmetry or unimodality. Also a non-
normal distribution may have no special causes acting upon it but its
distributional form is non-symmetric.
Time-based statistical and probabilistic methods do provide necessary
and sufficient methods of determining if special causes exist. Although
several classes of methods are useful in this task, the 111ost versatile and
robust is the genre of control charts which were first developed and
implemented by Dr. Walter Shewhart of the Bell Laboratories' while
studying process data in the 1920's. He first made the distinction
between controlled and uncontrolled variation due to what is called
common and special causes. He developed a simple but powerful tool to
separate the two-" the control chart. Since that time, control charts have
been used successfully in a wide variety of process control and
improvement situaUons. Experience has shown that control charts
effectively direct attention toward special causes of variation when they
occur and reflect the extent of co111mon cause variation that 1nust be
reduced by system or process i111prove111ent.
It is impossible to reduce the above mistakes to zero. Dr. Shewhart
realized this and developed a graphical approach to tninimize, over the
long run, the economic loss from both mistakes.

s Deming ( 1989) and Deming (1994).

9
Shewhart (1931 ).

29
CHAPTER J - Section G
Control Charts: Tools For Process Control and Improvement

If process control activities assure that no special cause sources of

variation are active 10 , the process is said to be in statistical control or "in
control." Such processes are said to he stable, predictable, and consistent
since it is possible to predict 11 the performance of the process.
The active existence of any special cause will render the process out of
statistical control or "out of control." 1'he perfonnance of such unstable
processes cannot be predicted.

How do they work?

Control Limits

When Shewhart developed control charts he was concerned with the

economic control of processes; i.e., action is taken on the process only
when special causes are present. 'l'o do this, sample statistics are
compared to control limits. But how arc these limits determined"
Consider a process distribution that can be described by the normal form.
The goal is to determine when special causes are affecting it. Another
way of saying this is. "Has the process changed since it was last looked
at it or during the period sampled?"

Shewhart's Two Rules for the Presentation of Data:

Data should always be presented in such a way that preserves the
evidence in the data for all the predictions that might be made from these
data.
Whenever an average, range, or histogram is used to summarize data,
the summary should not mislead the user into taking any action that the
user would not take if the data were presented in a time series.

Has the process

L
changed

Since the normal distribution is described by its process location (mean)

and process width (range or standard deviation) this question becomes:
Has the process location or process width changed"
Consider only the location. What approach can be used to determine if
the process location has changed? One possibility would be to look at

10
This is done by using the process information to identify and eliminate the existence of special causes
or detecting them and removing their effect when they do occur.
II
As with all probabilistic methods some risk is involved. The exact level of belief in prediction of
future actions cannot be determined by statistical measures alone. Subject-matter expertise is
required.

30
 CHAPTER I - Seclion G
Control Charts: Tools For Process Control and ltnprovement

every part produced by the process, but that is usually not economical.
The alternative is to use a sample of the process, and calculate the n1ean
of the sample,

Has the process

location changed

take n samples
calculate x

If the process has not changed, will the sample mean be equal to the
distribution 1nean?
The answer is that this very rarely happens, But how is this possible?
After all, the process has not changed, Doesn't that imply that the
process mean re1nains the same? T'he reason for this is that the san1ple
rncan js only an esti1nation of the process n1ean.
To make this a little clearer, consider taking a sample of size one, The
mean of the sample is the individual sample itself, With such random
samples from the distribution, the readings will eventually cover the
entire process range. l..Jsing the fon11ula:

Range of the distribmion of means= (j)i;') Process Range

for a sample of size four, the resulting range of sample averages will be
1/J4 =};;, of the process range; for a sample of size I00 it will be
, l 12
1/.j]OO =) i{l of t 1e process range.

Shewhart used this sampling distribution to establish an operational

definition of "in statistical controL" First, start off with the assumption
that the process is in statistical control, i.e., innocent until proven guilty.
Then, compare the sample to the sampling distribution using the ±3
standard deviation limits"- These are called control limits. If the sample
falls outside these limits then there is reason to believe that a special
cause is present Further, it is expected that all the (random) samples will
exhibit a randon1 ordering \Vithin these li1nits. If a group of sa1nples
shows a pattern there is reason lo believe that a special cause is present.
(see Chapter l, Section C, and Chapter II, Section A),

12
See the Central Li1nit Theorern.
u Shewhart selected the ±3 standard deviation limits as useful limits in achieving the economic control of
processes.

31
CHAPTER J - Section G
ConLrol Charts: Tools For Process Control and hnprove1nent

Distribution of Averages [)istribution of lndividuab

take n samples
'
J.
calculate x
LCL lTCI.

due to Sampling Variation

In general, to set up a cootrol chart we calculate:
Centerline= average of the statistic being analyzed
lJCL =upper control limil =centerline+ 3 x stnndard deviation of the averages
LC:L = lower control limit= centerline -- 3 x standard deviation of the averages

Approach:
Since Control Charts provide the operational definition of "in statistical
control," they arc useful tools at every stage of the Improvement Cycle
(see Chapter 1, Section F). Within each stage, the PDSA 14 cycle should
be used.

For analysis of existing data sets

For the Analysis and Improvement stages of the cycle:
• Review the data:
ls the metric appropriate; i.e., does it reflect a process attribute
and tied to a key business factor?
Are the data consistent; i.e., is the same operational definition
used by all parties collecting the data?
Are the data reliable; i.e., is a planned data collection scheme
utilized"
ls the measurement system appropriate and acceptable"
• Plot the data:
Plot using the time order
Con1pare to control hmits and deter1nine if there are any points
outside the control limits

14
Plan-Do-Study-Act cycle; also known as the PDCA, (Plan-Do-Check-Act) cycle.

32
 CHAPTER 1-- Section G
Control Charts: Tools For Process Control and Trnprovernent

Compare to the centerline and determine if there are any non-

random patterns clearly discernible
• Analyze the data
• Take appropriate action
The data arc compared with the control limits to see whether the
variation is stable and appears to come from only co1nmon causes. If
special causes of variation are evident, the process is studied to further
determine what is affecting it. After actions (see Chapter I, Section D)
have been taken, further data are collected, control limits are recalculated
if necessary, and any additional special causes are acted upon,
After all special causes have been addressed and the process is running in
statistical control, the control chart continues as a 1nonitoring tool.
Process capability can also be calculated. If the variation from common
causes is excessive, the process cannot produce output that consistently
meets customer requirements. The process itself 1nust be investigated,
and, typically, management action must be taken to improve the system.

For control
• Review the data collection scheme before starting:
ls the metric appropriate: i.e., does it reflect a process attribute
and tied to a key business factor 0
Will the data be consistent; i.e., is the same operational
definition used by all parties collecting the datao
Will the data be reliable; i.e., is a planned data collection scheme
used?
Is the measurement system appropriate and acceptable''
• Plot each point as it is determined:
Compare to control limits and detern1ine if there are any points
outside the control limits
Compare to the centerline and detennine if there are any non-
random patterns clearly discernible
• Analyze the data
• Take appropriate action:
Continue to run with no action taken; or
Identify source of the special cause and remove (if unacceptable
response) or reinforce (if acceptable response); or
Continue to run with no action taken and reduce satnple size or
frequency; or
Initiate a continual improve1nent action

Otten it is found that although the process was aimed at the target
value during initial setup, the actual process location ( µ )11 may not

15
The Greek letter µ is used to indicate the actual process mean, which is estimated by the sample
meanX.

33
CHAPTER l - Section G
Control Charts: Tools For Process Control and Improvement

match this value. For those processes where the actual location
deviates from the target and the ability to relocate the process is
economical, consideration should be given to adjusting the process
so that it is aligned with the target (see Chapter IV, Section C). This
assumes that this adjustment does not affect the process variation.
This may not always hold true, but the causes for any possible
increase in process variation after re-targeting the process should be
understood and assessed against both customer satisfaction and
CCOllOllllCS.

The long-tenn perfonnanee of the process should continue lo be

analyzed. This can be accomplished by a periodic and systematic
review of the ongoing control charts. New evidence of special
causes might be revealed. Some special causes, when understood,
will be beneficial and useful for process improvement Others will
be detrimental, and will need to be coJTected or removed.

The purpose of the Improvement Cycle is to gain an understanding of the

process and its variability to improve its performance. As this
understanding matures, the need for continual monitoring of product
variables may become less - especially in processes where
documented analysis shows that the dominant source of variation are
more efficiently and effectively controlled by other approaches. For
example; in processes where maintenance is the dominant source ot
variation, the process is best controlled by preventive and predictive
maintenance; for processes where process setup is the dominant source
of variation, the process is best controlled by setup control charts.

For a process that is in statistical control, improvement efforts will alien

focus on reducing the common cause variation in the process. Reducing
this variation will have the effect of "shrinking" the control limits on the
control chart (i.e., the limits, upon their recalculation, will be closer
together). Many people, not familiar with control charts, feel this is
"penalizing" the process for improving. They do not realize that if a
process is stable and the control limits are calculated correctly, the
chance that the process will eJToneously yield an out-of-control point is
the same regardless of the distance between the control limits (see
Chapter l, Section E).
One area deserving mention is the question of recalculation of control
chmt limits. Once properly computed, and if no changes to the common
cause variation of the process occur, then the control limits re1nain
legitimate. Signals of special causes of variation do not require the
recalculation of control limits. For long-term analysis of control charts, it
is best to recalculate control limits as infrequently as possible; only as
dictated by changes in the process.
For continual process in1provement, repeat the three stages of the
Improvement Cycle: Analyze the Process; Maintain (Control) the
Process; Improve the Process, see Figure 1.4.

34
 CHAPTER 1~ Section G
Control Charts: Tools Por Process Control and Improvernenl

This page intentionally left blank

35
CHAPTER I~ Section H
Effective Use and Benefits Of Control Charts

BENEFITS OF CONTROL CHARTS

Properly used, control charts can:

• Be used by operators for ongoing control of a process
• Help the process perform consistently and predictably
• Allow the process to achieve
- Higher quality
- Lower unit cost
- Higher effective capability
• Provide a common language for discussing the performance of the
process
• Distinguish special from common causes of variation, as a guide to
local action or action on the system.

36
 CHAPTER ! -"Section H
Effective Use and Benefits Of Control Charts

CHAPTER I - Section H
Effective Use and Benefits of Control Charts
Important benefits can be obtained from the effective use of control
charts. The gains and benefits from the control charts are directly related
to the following:
Management Philosophy: How the company is managed can directly
impact the effectiveness of SPC.
The following arc examples of what needs to be present:
• ~'ocus the organization on variation reduction.
• Establish an open environ1nent that minin1izes internal cotnpetition
and supports cross-functional teamwork.
• Support and fund management and employee training in the proper
use and application of SPC.
• Show support and interest in the application and resulting benefits of
properly applied SPC. Make regular visits and asks questions in
those, areas,

• Apply SPC to promote the understanding of variation in engineering

processes.
• Apply SPC to management data and use the information in day·to·
day decision making.

The above items support the requirements contained in

ISO 9000:2000 and ISO/TS 16949:2002.

Engineering Philosophy: How engineering uses data to develop designs

can and will have an influence on the level and type of V(lriation in the
finished product.
The following arc some ways that engineering can show effective use of
SPC:
• Focus the engineering organization on variation reduction throughout
the design process; e.g., nu1nber of design changes, design for
manufacturing and assembly, personnel moves, etc.
• Establish an open engineering environment that minimizes internal
competition and supports cross-functional tea1nwork.
• Support and fund engineering management and employees training
in the proper use and application of SPC.
~ i~.. pply
SPC to pro1note the understanding of variation in engineering
processes.
• Require an understanding of variation and stability in relation to
measurement and the data that are used for design development.

37
CHAPTER I - Section H
Effective Use and Benefits Of Control Charts

• Support engmeering changes proposed due to analysis of SPC

information to aid in the reduction of variation.
Manufacturing: How manufacturing develops and operates machines
and transfer systems can i1npact the level and type of variation in the
finished product:
• Focus the 1nanufacturing organization on variation reduction; e.g.,
number of different processes, impact of multi-fixture and multi-tool
processes, tool and n1achine maintenance, etc.
• Establish an open engineering environment that ininimizes inte111al
con1petition and supports cross-functional teamwork.
• Support and fund 1nanufacturing management and employees
training in the proper use and application of SPC.
• Apply SPC in the understanding of variation in the manufacturing
processes.
• Require an understanding of variation and stability in relation to
measurement and the data that are used for process design
development
• Use the analysis of SPC information to support process changes for
the reduction of variation.
• Do not release control cha1ts to operators until the process is stable.
The transfer of responsihility for the process to production should
occur after the process is stable.
• Assure proper placement of SPC data for optimum use by the
employees.

Quality Control: The Quality function is a critical component in

providing support for an effective SPC process:
• Support SPC training for management, engineering, and employees
in the organization,
• Mentor key people in the organization in the proper application of
SPC.
• Assist in the identification and reduction of the sources of variation.
• Ensure optimum use of SPC data and information,

Production: Production personnel arc directly related to the process and

can affect process variation. 'fhey should:
• Be properly trained in the application of SPC and problem solving.
• f-Iave an understanding of variation and stability in relation to
measurement and the data that arc used for process control and
improvement.
• Be alert to and communicate when conditions change.
• Update, maintain and display control charts within area of
responsibility.

38
 CHAPTER I-· Section H
Effective Use and Benefits Of Control Charts

• Interact and learn about the process from the information collected,
• TJsc the SPC infonnation in real tlrne to run the process.

Application of the concepts outlined above will result in the proper

environment for the understanding and reduction of variation. l~hen the
Plan-Do-Study-Act process can be used to further improve the process,
At a minimum, the use of SPC for process monitoring will result in the
process being maintained at its current performance level. I-lowever, real
improvements can be achieved when SPC is used to direct the way
processes are analyzed.
Proper use of SPC can result in an organization focused on improving the
quality of the product and process,

39
CHAPTER I - Section H
Effective Use and Benef"its Of Control Charts

This page intentionally left blank

40
CHAPTER II
Control Charts

41
This page intentionally left blank

42
 CHAPTER ll
Control Charts

Introduction:

Control charts can be used to monitor or evaluate a process. There are

basically two types of control charts, those for variables data and those
for attributes data. The process itself will dictate which type of control
chart to use. If the data derived from the process arc of a discrete nature
(e.g., go/no-go, acceptable/not acceptable) then an attributes type of chart
would be used. If the data derived from the process are of a continuous
nature (e.g., diameter, length) then a variables type of chart would be
used. Within each chart type there are several chart combinations that
can be used to further evaluate the process.

Some of the more common chart types, Average ( X ) and Range ( R )

charts, Individuals (I) chart, Moving Range (MR) chm1, etc., belong to
the variables chart family. Charts based on count or percent data (e.g., p,
np, c, u) belong to the attributes chart family.
When introducing control charts into an organization, it is itnportant to
prioritize problem areas and use charts where they are most needed.
Problem signals can come from the cost control syste111, user complaints,
internal bottlenecks, etc. The use of attributes control charts on key
overall quality measures often points the way to the specific process
areas that would need more detailed examination including the possible
use of control charts for variables.
If available, variables data are always preferred as they contain 1norc
useful information than attributes data for the same amount of effort. For
example you need a larger sample size for attributes than for variables
data to have the same amount of confidence in the results. If the use of
variables measurement systems i.s infeasible, the application of attributes
analysis should not be overlooked.

43
CHAPTER JI
Control Charts

CONTROL CHARTS TO ANALYZE THE PROCESS

Process

Process evaluation requires Measurements

People Environment
111 1111 11 111111 11 11 1111 1111 111111
.12345678
1

The outcome is a Decision

Materials Measurement
based on the Measurements

Outcome Example Control Chart Examples

-
I
•Shaft O.D. (inches) x for the Average of
I

• Hole distance from reference surface (mm) the Measurement

•Circuit resistance (ohms)
• Railcar transit time (hours) R Chart for the Ranges
• Engineering change processing time (hours) of the Measurement

The measurement method must produce accurate and precise results over time
Not Precise Precise

Not Accurate
··0
... ·o
•• @)
•••€) •
Accurate*
••
•• ®
*Note: Some current metrology literature defines accuracy as the lack of bias.

Figure 11.1: Variables Data

44
 CHAPTER II
Control Charts

Variables Control Charts

Variables control charts represent the typical application of statistical
process control where the processes and their outputs can be
characterized by variable measurements (see Figure II. l ).
Variables control charts are particularly useful for several reasons:
• A quantitative value (e.g., "the diameter is 16.45 mm") contains
more information than a simple yes-no statement (e.g., "the diameter
is within specification");
• Although collecting variables data is usually more costly than
collecting attributes data (e.g., go/no-go), a decision can be reached
more quickly with a smaller sample size. This can lead to lower total
measurement costs due to increased efficiency;
• Because fewer parts need to be checked before making reliable
decisions, the time delay between an "out-of-control" signal and
corrective action is usually shorter; and
• With variables data, performance of a process can be analyzed, and
improvement can be quantified, even if all individual values are
within the specification limits. This is important in seeking continual
improvement.
A variables chart can explain process data in terms of its process
variation, piece-to-piece variation, and its process average. Because of
this, control charts for variables are usually prepared and analyzed in
pairs, one chart for process average and another for the process variation.
- -
The most commonly used pair arc the X and R charts. X is the
arithmetic average of the values in small subgroups - a measure of
process average; R is the range of values within each subgroup (highest
minus lowest) a measure of process variation. Ho\vever, there are a
nutnber of other control charts that may be 1nore useful under certain
circutnstances.

The X and R charts may be the most common charts, but they may not
be the most appropriate for all situations.

45
CHAPTER ll
Control Charts

CONTROL CHARTS TO CLASSIFY THE PROCESS

Process

Decision is based on the

People Environment Classification of the Outcome

IHHHHHI
.~i!!~!~~~~ ..... . . I
... . . . . . . . ........
Materials Measurement

Outcome Example Control Chart Examples

Vehicle does not leak p Chart for Proportion of
Units Nonconforming
Lamp lights does not light
Hole diameter undersized or oversized np Chart for Number of
(evaluated using a goinogo gage) Units Nonconforming 1

>--S_h_ip_m_e_n_t_t_o_d_e_a_le_r_c_o_r_re_c_t_o_r_in_c_o_rr_e_c_t~~-r-~~~~~~~~~~~~-~
Bubbles in a windshield c Chart for Number of
Nonconformances per Unit
Paint imperfections on door u Chart for Number of
Errors on an invoice Nonconformities per Unit

The conformance criteria must be clearly defined and the procedures for deciding ii
those criteria are met must produce consistent results over time.

Acceptance Criteria Examples Comment

Surface should be free from flaws What is a flaw?
Surface should conform to master standard Conform to what degree?
in color, texture, brightness Do inspectors agree?
and have not imperfections How is it measured?

Any material applied to mirror back to shall

. Visible to whom?
not cause visible staining of the backing Under what conditions

Figure 11.2: Attributes Data

46
 CHAPTER II
Control Charts

Attributes Control Charts

Although control charts are most otien thought of in terms of variables,
control charts have also been developed for attributes; see Figure IL2.
Attributes data have discrete values and they can be counted for
recording and analysis. With attribute analysis the data arc separated into
distinct categories (conforming/nonconforming, pass/fail, go/no-go,
present/absent, low/medium/high). Examples include the presence of a
required label, the continuity of an electrical circuit, visual analysis of a
painted surface, or errors in a typed document.
Other examples are of characteristics that are measurable, but where the
results arc recorded in a simple yes/no fashion, such as the conformance
of a shat! diameter when measured on a go/no-go gage, the acceptability
of door margins to a visual or gage check, or on-ti1ne delivery
pcrforn1ance. Control charts for attributes are in1portant for several
reasons:
• Attributes data situations exist in any technical or administrative
process, so attributes analysis techniques are useful in many
applications. The most significant difficulty is to develop precise
operational definitions of \vhat is conformjng.
• Attributes data are alread:y available in rnany situation!-. - wherever
there are existing inspections, repair logs, sorts of rejected material,
etc. In these cases, no additional effort is required for data collection.
The only expense involved is for the effort of converting the data to
control chart form.
• Where new data must be collected, attributes information is
generally quick and inexpensive to obtain. With simple gaging (e.g.,
LSL USL a go/no-go gage or visual standards), specialized measurement skills
i---
II III II are often are not required. 'I'here are many occasionS where
Target
J specialized measurement skills are required especially when the part
measure d t.a JI s 1n
. tie
I " gray " area. 16
• Much data gathered for management summary reporting are often in
attributes fonn and can benefit fro1n control chart analysis. 12.xa1nples
include scrap rates, quality audits and material rejections. Because of
the ability to distinguish between special and common cause
variation, control chart analysis can be valuable in interpreting these
111anagement reports.
This manual will use conforming/nonconforming throughout attributes
discussions simply because
• These categories are "traditionally" used
• Organizations just starting on the path to continual i1nprove1nent
usually begin with these categories
• Many of the examples available in literature use these categories.
It should not be inferred that these are the only "acceptable" categories or
that attributes charts cannot be used with Case I processes; sec Chapter I,
Section E. 17

16
See the Attribute Measurement System Study chapter in the MSA Reference Manual.
17
See also: Montgomery (1997), Wheeler (1991, 1995), Wisc and Fair (1998).

47
 CHAPTER 11
Control Charts

Elements of Control Charts

ANALYZE MAINTAIN
There is no single "approved" manner of displaying control chmts.
However the reasons for the use of control charts (see Chapter I, Section
E) must be kept in mind. Any format is acceptable as long as it contains
the following (see Figure 11.3):

• (A) Appropriate scale

IMPROVE
The scale should be such that the natural variation of the process can
be easily viewed. A scale which yields a "narrow" control chart does
not enable analysis and control of the process.

YES
NO

So mp"

JO .'5 JG
somple

• (8) UCL, LCL

The ability to determine outliers which signal special causes the
control chart requires control limits based on the sampling
distribution. Specifications limits should not be used in place of valid
control limits for process analysis and control.
• (8) Centerline
The control chart requires a centerline based on the sampling
distribution in order to allow the determination of non-random
patterns which signal special causes.
• (C) Subgroup sequence/ timeline
Maintaining the sequence in which the data are collected provides
indications of "when" a special cause occurs and whether that special
cause is tin1e-oricnted.
• (0) Identification of out-of-control plotted values
Plotted points which are out of statistical control should be identified
on the control chart. For process control the analysis for special
causes and their identification should occur as each sample is plotted
as well as periodic reviews of the control chart as a whole for non-
rando1n patterns.
• (E) Event Log

Besides the collection, charting, and analysis of data, additional

supporting information should be collected. This information should

48
 CHAPTER II
Control Charts

include any potential sources of variation as well as any actions

taken to resolve out-oFcontrol signals (OCS). This information can
he recorded on the control chart or on a separate Event Log.

If there has not been any change in the process between subgroups, it is
not necessary to include an entry on the process event log.

A D B

42
UCL
u 41
:;:;
"'
~-----------------------------
:;:; 40 Centerline
!S
Cl)
39
------- LCL
38
Subgroup 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

OCS Subgroup Event Log

c 4
1 i first shift -- new setup; insert IC27; material lot #1984

! second shift ::-new-setup;

insert IC27; materia1Tot#1931
!third shift -- new seiui);-insertli::s4; material 10Ui10Rso
... 6
7 ----rlirst shift -- material lot #2179, replaced bad insert
9 ! thirdshift::-material lot #2193

12 . !first shift -- material lot #1950 ___ _

23 i second shift -- material lot #ZM18
I ------
etc.
----:-----

E
Figure 11.3: Elements of Control Charts

During the initial analysis of the process, knowledge of what would

constitute a potential special cause for this specific process 1nay be
incomplete. Consequently, the initial information collection activities
may include events which will prove out not to be special causes. Such
events need not be identified in subsequent infom1ation collection
activities. If initial inforn1ation collection activities are not sufficiently
comprehensive, then time niay be wasted in identifying specific events
vvhich cause out-of-control signals.

49
CHAPTER II
Control Charts

For control charts which are included as a part of a report and for those
which are maintained manually the following "header" infonnation
should be included:
• What: part/product/service name and number/identification
• Where: operation/process step information, name/identification
• Who: operator and appraiser
• How: measurement system used, name/number, units (scale)
• How many: subgroup size, uniform or by sample
• When: sampling scheme (frequency and time)

Figure ll.4 shows a completed manually maintained control chart which

includes all these elements

50
 SHEETNo.43

Average and Range Chart

l
i~""'~Qubic Release LD013 DIOlJE'V Length 5.0 +i_ 5.0 5 I 4 snhgps/shifi xx/xx/xx :>LX/x \/xx

-
VG!O FJG!8 PS,\105 PSi\103 GRR: 13~.{, Jlrocess p'""""""'"''".i<>
Avoro1w FW>g•
E:R == 5.050
2.41
UCLX
LCL"
6.438
3.(l62
UCL~ 5.09
LCLR - (LOO

.,,
J
'

cE'
c:
.....
CD

:...
Ill
CJ) >
Ill
3
"O
"" I
iii
(") 0:
'-" 0 5~ I I
....:::s..... W l I
0 ! (!) ' j

(")
i ~ 2.5 j -- ""i" --------

1 -~ JB.GROUPJD ll ~ : :·j~·. t:~~f611

::I'
Ill
....
.....
~
.,,.....
0
:::s
.... i TIME
: I
xx xx
'
4
-
xx !_xx_ I .xx
5 6 7 I 8
j
xx; xx 1_xx
I 9 I;-.;I
;
xx _x_~ f_xx xx_ xx
'
i xx xx. xx j xx
17 '. 18
I xx
!
19
xx xx
20 21
xx
22
xx
23 24
xx ; xx
25 26
xx xx_ xx
27 28
i xx_;
,l_jl . 1
i
!!!.
~
c.
CD l__.D':TE
.
:: ,
x3
n!:~ i:~ :::~ ~:~·~:~ f:~ ,~:~ ~:~ f:~ ~:~ ~:~ f~ ,~:~ t~~~~ :i·~ ::~ Ii:~ ~:~ nf:~t~ !:~ ~:~ ::~ i:~ :~:: ·
1

I 5.5 4.0 5.6 6.9 5.3 2.7 4.3 5.3 6.5 3.2 6.2 5.4 4.9 2.7 s.2 3.7 4.7 4.6 4.9 s.1 4.7 5.9 3.8 s.o 3.5 5.9 4.9 3.3
, .L. :.,

_
I
1
x41~.!~6.0 5.1 '6.8~5.4 5.1 ~!;].9;2.713.6 6.3 4.4 5.0 4A 4.3 -t2 ~7,5.5 5.4 5.5 5.1 ~.Q ~·~-~·~ 6.9 4.9 4.0.5.4_ 1 . I
'1 4.8 4 I (J.6 4.-t 5.3 5.9 5.4 I 5.J 4.6 5.2 4.0 6.6 6.4 4.5 4. I S.:'i 4. 7 4.0 6.9 7. 7 7.0 3.2 4.1 3.9 I 5.2 5. 9 5.5 '3.8
:<5 j
1

-suM OF INO!V!DUA~ -~7 .0 25.2~9. t - 27 I j 26.2 23.6 22_:4 2b_~2_16 21.2 24.6126.5 23.3 23.2 ~~.2 -~--!:~ 30.0 24.'7 29.5 32. 7 27.2 29~ b_~~ ~~-~ 25.9 29.5 !24.1 j23.5
AVt:RAGE X 5-HI SJ/4 58_~542j5.24 472 4.48 4.70 472 4.24 4.92 5.~0 4.(16 4.h4 4.-14 49_!~.fi.00 1 4.94 5.90 6S4 5A4 4.12 470-1.50 5.185.90 4.821470
_
~---R_ANGE · R _ 1.4 2.3 2.6 2.6 1.2 3.2_ _1.7 _3.0 3.8 2.5 2.4 _±·~ 3.2 3.6 1.3 2.8 _, 2.S I 2.4 2.0 }:_!!_ 2.4 2.9 2.J I. t 3.4 I 1.5 -~.:.?J.2.3 -------~'-~i
1
i Qn
8 :r
_.,,
a>
g~
~ ;;ci
;;: ~
CHAPTER II
Control Charts

OCS Subgroup Event Log

1
- -- ---------------
S1 -- newsetup; insert MH18; material lo~_lt_1219~0
2 S1 -- n/c
3 S1 -- material lot #081984
4 S1 -- n/c
5 S2 -- material lot #081950
6 . S2 -- new setup; insert DA14; continue material lot #081950
7 S2 -- material lot #111951
8 S2 -- n/c
9 S3 -- new setup; insert DM19; material lot #111952
10 S3 -- replaced broken insert with DM23; continue material lot
11 S3 -- material lot #111953
!-------_:___-
12
- ---------
• S3 -- n/c
'

13
14 is1--n/c
15 S1 -- material lot #111955
16 S1 -- n/c
~§2.,:ITlaterial ..1.ot. #111956 ....
18 i S2 -- backup--"-·------,.
operator
-r-------------------------- •.,,.,.
-- D.A.
19 · S2 -- material lot #111957
A 20 S2 -- bad material -- stopped production; red tagged material
------ -------
is_~questered production_fr<>_ITl_lot_change.
i sorted production -- found 21 O/Sparts
-:-------------------------------- - -- -----------------

21
- -···········---- S3 -- new
. . ........ .
setup; insert JK28; material lot #1_!1_9~l!-
22 S3 -- n/c
23 S3 -- material lot #081943
24 ... ~§3--_n/c: _
25 J_s1 -- new setup; insert GG16; material lot #031942
26 S1 -- n/c
27 S1 -- material lot #111940
28 S1 -- n/c

- -------
Note: Sx indicates the shift; n/c indicates no changes in the process.

Figure ll.4b: Sample Control Chart (back side) - Event Log

52
 CHAPTER 11 - SecLion A
Control Chaning Process

CHAPTER II - Section A
Control Chart Process
Preparatory Steps
Before control charts can be used, several preparatory steps should be
taken:

Establish an environment suitable for action,

Define the process,

Determine the features or characteristics to be charted based on:

§ The customer's needs,
§ Current and potential problem areas,
§ Con·elation between characteristics.

Correlation between variables does not imply a causal relationship, In

Caution the absence of process knowledge, a designed experiment may be
needed to verify such relationships and their significance,

Define the characteristic,

The characteristic must be operationally defined so that results
can be communicated to all concerned in ways that have the
same meaning today as yesterday, Tl1is involves specifying what
inforn1ation is to be gathered, where, how, and under what
conditions.
An operational definition describes the characteristic that is to be
evaluated and whether the characteristic is qualitative (discrete)
or quantitative (continuous), Attributes control charts would be
used to monitor and evaluate discrete variables whereas variables
control charts would be used to 1nonitor and evaluate continuous
variables.

Define the measurement systen1.

Total process variability consists of part-to-part variability and
measurement system variability, ll is very important to evaluate
the effect of the measurement system's variability on the overall
process variability and determine whether it is acceptable. The
111easurement performance 111ust be predictable in tcr1ns of
accuracy, precision and stability,
Periodic calibration is not enough to validate the measurement
systetn's capability for its intended use. In addition to heing
calibrated, the mcasureinent system n1ust be evaluated in terms
of its suitability for the intended use,

53
CHAPTER 1f - Section A
ConLrol Charting Process

For more detail on this subject see the Measurement Systems

Analysis (MSA) Reference Manual. The definition of the
mcasuren1ent system \.viii detennine what type of chart, variables
or attributes, is appropriate.

Minimize unnecessary variation.

Unnecessary external causes of variation should be reduced
before the study begins. This could simply mean watching that
the process is being operated as intended. The purpose is to
avoid obvious problems that could and should be corrected
without use of control charts. This includes process adjustment
or over control. In all cases, a process event log may be kept
noting all relevant events such as tool changes, new raw material
lots, measurement system changes, etc. This will aid in
subsequent process analysis.

Assure selection scheme is appropriate for detecting expected

special causes.

WARNING: Even though convenience sampling and/or haphazard

sampling is often thought of as being random sampling, it is not. If one
assumes that it is, and in reality it is not, one carries an unnecessary risk
that may lead to erroneous and or biased conclusions.

For more details see Chapter I, Section H.

54
 CHAPTER 11- Section B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

Control Chart Mechanics

The steps to using control charts are:

1. Data Collection
2. Establish Control Limits
3. Interpret for Statistical Control
4. Extend Control Limits for ongoing control (see Figure 11.5)

Data Collection

Control charts are developed from measurements of a particular

characteristic or feature of the process. These measurements arc
combined into a (control) statistic (e.g .• average. median, range, standard
deviation, individual) which describes an attribute of the process
distributional fonn. The measurement data are collected from individual
samples from a process stream The samples are collected in subgroups
and may consist of one or more pieces. In general, a larger subgroup size
makes it easier to detect small process shifts.

Create a Sampling Plan

For control charts to be effective the sampling plan should define

rational subgroups. A rational subgroup is one in \Vhich the samples are
selected so that the chance for variation due to special causes occurring
within a subgroup is minimized, while the chance for special cause
variation betvveen subgroups is maxi1nized. 'fhe key ite1n to rcn1e1nber
when developing a sampling plan is that the variation between subgroups
is going to be compared to the variation within subgroups. Taking
consecutive samples for the subgroups minimizes the opportunity for the
process to change and should 1ninimize the vvithin~suhgroup variation.
The sampling frequency will determine the opportunity the process has
to change between subgroups.
'fhe variation within a subgroup represents the piece-to-piece variation
over a short period of time. 18 Any significant variation between
subgroups would reflect changes in the process that should be
investigated for appropriate action.
Suh group Size The type of process under investigation dictates how the
subgroup size is defined. As stated earlier, a larger subgroup size makes
it easier to detect small process shills. The team responsible has to
detennine the appropriate subgroup size. If the expected shift is
relatively small, then a larger subgroup size would be needed compared
to that required if the anticipated shift is large.

18
See also Appendix A.

SS
CHAPTER ll - Section B
Defining "Out of Control'' Signals

.. ... '
.....•. ,' _________
........• .. ' -- ------- ...
'
····· ... _.,, .......... 1 .•......••. ················· i--- ------ - -
. ..

... .
I>< .. ..... ...
. ...
I

,IJ.
'
... -
""""'' '"'

;·;;;;· __ .. .... _.., ..... _ ~_ ... ;;._..;. - ... '!'<,.,.. ....

I .. '!"-.~ ;.-
...
' '
w 6.0 .
..
.
....
......... ' . ...
I
..
. .
' ....
...
....
.

(!) ..
....
.. . I . .. \ . I ......
..........

' ....
. ..
...........
.. . ························'
-------- i
- ----------

<( . f . .. ..... ...

~ 5.0
...
''''
.
''"'' I \ ...........
,.
...
.
.
....
..
------------ i·
. .
I.
,
w
> ....
..
-
----------------
...

··············
..
.
. ..

..

·············
.

1 •••..••

- ----
L
...
... .............
.

,
.....
...... ...............

.
..
. .....
...

.................... ·················'
·······

<( 4.0 .......... ...

... ......... , ........ I
.
' .
........ ,.. k---- Ii-__ __ UE
~""-""
.... .... i

,
..
..
..
..
fcf. ....
'
___

..
. .......
_______
•................

..... .....
'················
..,
. ..........
'
. '
. ' ... . ...

-- - ----- - - - - - - L_ --------- -- -
.. . .
'··
~ ,., _____,,..
5.0 '
""--"" ~---
' {-""""""·""' -
.. .

w .
'
'
...... '············ I ' ...
'
'
(!) ..
'
'
z 2.5 ..
... .....
i ...
.. ' ,, . ... ... ......
........ ........
. ...
'
'
<( '-·
."
... / . / . ..
.
i/ ... L ' '
~
... ........ . ..
- · .... .... ' ...
' ~. ' ........... . ..... '
r1 : i

' ······ I J l __________j ____________ !____________ .. :_

TIME "" Plot new data against the

'········ ..

DATE 6/17 l / ongoing control limits.

~

x1 ,4.2 52 64 .:i b.4 ..... :

x2 44 5.1 6.4 5.2 I 5.6
x3
' 5.0
.......
3.5 5.9 4.9
....... '
3.3 ....
x4
.......... . ........ ' .... 1 ....

xS ........
'
, .............
'

SUM OF INDIVIDUALS 13.6 13.8 18.7 14.6 14.3 •

AVERAGE- x ,4.53 '4.60 6 ?' 4.87 4.77

I
RANGE- R 0.8 1.7 0.5 0.7 2.3 I
Figure 11.5: Extending Control Limits

56
 Cl IAPTER II - Section B
Defining ·'Out of Control" Signals

'fhe subgroup size should re1nain constant but there tnay be situations
where the subgroup size varies within a single control chart. The
calculation of the control li1nits depends on the subgroup size and if one
varies the subgroup size the control limits \vill change for that subgroup.
There arc other techniques that deal with variable subgroup sizes; for
example, see Montgomery (1997) and Grant and Leavenworth ( 1996).
Suhgroup Frequency - The subgroups are taken sequentially in time,
e.g., once every 15 minutes or twice per shift. The goal is to detect
changes in the process over time. Subgroups should be collected often
enough, and at appropriate times so that they can reflect the potential
opportunities for change. The potential causes of change could be due to
work-shift differences, relief operators, warm-up trends, material lots,
etc.
Numher of Subgroups - The number of subgroups needed to establish
control limits should satisfy the following criterion: enough subgroups
should be gathered to assure that the major sources of variation which
can affect the process have had an opportunity to appear. Generally, 25
or more subgroups containing about 100 or more individual readings
give a good test for stability and, if stable, good estimates of the process
location and spread. This number of subgroups ensures that the effect of
any extreme values in the range or standard deviation will be ininimized.
ln some cases, existing data may be available which could accelerate this
first stage of the study. However, they should be used only if they are
recent and if the basis for establishing subgroups is clearly understood.
Before continuing, a rational sampling plan must be developed and
documented.
Sampling Scheme - If the special causes affecting the process can occur
unpredictably. the appropriate sampling scheme is a random (or
probability) sample. A random sample is one in which every sample
point (rational subgroup) has the same chance (probability) of being
selected. A random sample is systematic and planned; that is, all sample
points are determined before any data are collected. For special causes
that are kno\vn to occur at speci fie times or events, the sampling schc1ne
should utilize this knowledge. Haphazard sampling or convenience
sampling not based on the expected occurrence of a specific special
cause should be avoided since this type of sampling provides a fabe
sense of security; it can lead to a biased result and consequently a
possible erroneous decision.
Whichever sampling scheme is used all sample points should be
determined before any data are collected (sec Deming ( 1950) and Gruska
(2004)).

NOTE: For a discussion about rational subgrouping and the effect of

subgrouping on control chart interpretation see Appendix A

57
CHAPTER TI - Section B
Defining "Out of Conlrol" Signals

Control Chart Setup

A control chart will have sections for:

Header information including the description of the process and

sampling plan.

Recording/displaying the actual data values collected.

This should also include the date & time or other subgroup
identification.

For interim data calculations (optional for automated charts).

This should also include a space for the calculations based
on the readings and the calcnlated control statistic(s).

For plotting each of the control statistics being analyzed.

The value for the control statistic is usually plotted on the
vertical scale and the horizontal scale is the sequence in
time. The data values and the plot points for the control
statistic should be aligned vertically. The scale should be
broad enough to contain all the variation in the control
statistic. A guideline is that the initial scale could be set to
twice the difference between the (expected) maximum and
tninimum values.

To log observations.
This section should include details such as process
adjustments, tooling changes, material changes, or other
events which may affect the variability of the process.

Record Raw Data

Enter the individual values and the identification for each
subgroup.

Log any pertinent observation(s).

Calculate Sample Control Statistic(s) for Each Subgroup

The control statistics to be plotted are calculated from the subgroup

n1easuremcnt data. These statistics inay be the sample mean, median,
range, standard deviation, etc. Calculate the statistics according to the
fonnulae for the type of chart that is being used.

58
 CHAPTER Tl - Seclion B
Defining ''Out of Control'' Signals

Plot the Control Statistic(s) on the Control Charts

Plot the control statistic on the chart. Make sure that the plot points for
the corresponding control statistics are aligned vertically. Connect the
points with lines to help visualize patterns and trends.
The data should be reviewed while they are being collected in order to
identify potential problems. If any points are substantially higher or
lower than the others, confirm that the calculations and plots are correct
and log any pertinent observations.

Establish Control Limits

Control limits are defined by the natural variation of the control statistic.
They define a range of values that the control statistic could randomly
fall within, given there is only corn1non cause to the variation. If the
average of two different subgroups from the same process is calculated,
it is reasonable to expect that they will be about the same. But since they
were calculated using different parts, the two averages are not expected
lo be identical. Even though the two averages are different, there is a
lin1it to how different they are expected to be, due to randorn chance.
This defines the location of the control limits.
This is the basis for all control chart techniques. If the process is stable
(i.e., having only common cause variation), then there is a high
probability that for any subgroup sample the calculated control statistic
will fall within the control limits. If the control statistic exceeds the
control limits then this indicates that a special cause variation may be
present.
There arc two phases in statistical process control studies.
1. 'fhe first is identifying and eliminating the special causes of
variation in the process. The objective is to stabilize the process.
A stable, predictable process is said to be in statistical control.
2. The second phase is concerned with predicting future
measurements thus verifying ongoing process stability. During
this phase, data analysis and reaction to special causes is done in
real time. Once stable, the process can be analyzed to determine
if it is capable of producing what the customer desires.

Identify the centerline and control limits of the control chart

To assist in the graphical analysis of the plotted control statistics, draw

lines to indicate the location estin1ate (centerline) and control li1T1its of
the control statistic on the chart.
In general, to set up a control chart calculate:
Centerline,
Upper Control Limit (UCL),
Lower Control Limit (LCL).
See Chapter TI, Section C, for the formulas.

59
CHAPTER II - Section B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

Interpret for Statistical Control

If the process has no special causes affecting its variability, then the
control statistics will fall between the control limits in a random fashion
(i,e,, no patterns will be evident),
Special causes can atrect either the process location (e,g,, average,
median) or the variation (e,g,, range, standard deviation) or bolh, The
objective of control chart analysis is to identify any evidence that the
process variability or the process location is not operating at a constant
level - that one or both are out of statistical control - and lo take
appropriate action.
In the subsequent discussion, the Average will be used for the location
control statistic and the Range for the variation control statistic. The
conclusions stated for these control statistics also apply equally to the
other possible control statistics.
Since the control limits of the location statistic are dependent on the
variation statistic, the variation control statistic should be analyzed first
for stability. The variation and location statistics are analyzed separately,
but comparison of patterns between the two charts may sometimes give
added insight into special causes affecting the process
A process cannot be said to be stable (in statistical control) unless both
charts have no out-of-control conditions (indications of special causes).

Analyze the Data Plots on the Range Chart

Since the ability to interpret either the subgroup ranges or subgroup
averages depends on the estimate of piece-to-piece variability, the R
chart is analyzed first. The data points are compared with the control
limits, for points out of control or for unusual patterns or trends (see
Chapter II, Section D)

Find and Address Special Causes (Range Chart)

For each indication of a special cause in the range chart data, conduct an
analysis of the process operation to determine the cause and improve
process understanding; co1Tect that condition, and prevent it from
recurring. The control chart itself should be a useful guide in problem
analysis, suggesting when the condition may have began and how long it
continued. However, recognize that not all special causes are negative;
some special causes can result in positive process improven1ent in terms
of decreased variation in the range - those special causes should be
assessed for possible institutionalization within the process, where
appropriate.
Tin1eliness is in1portant in problem analysis, both in terms of minimizing
the production of inconsistent output, and in terms of having fresh
evidence for diagnosis. For instance, the appearance of a single point
beyond the control limits is reason to begin an immediate analysis of the

60
 CHAPTER IT - Section B
Defining "Out of Control'' Signals

process. A process event log may also be a helpful source of information

in terms of identifying special causes of variation.

X AND R CONTROL CHART

!"""'~""-""" f•""'"'",,---- -~.

xxx '
: xxx !' 5/2 HOURS
. ···--~~;'=---,=~"~e~.'~";';'"~= -- "''-··· ...............:".o: Ill -'JO MM - !' Uc
0.807
BE~D CLIP """'"'""" xR== 0.7112
!U

I>< ""
85
UJ ucc
(!) "'
?5
< xw
"'
UJ
> LCL
65

< 00

"
5()
Step 2
oO

"'w LL'l 10

:\()
(!)
z f\ 20

< w
"'

'for sample sizeo of less than seven, illere 1s na lower cont1ol lin1i11or rangco

Figure 11.6: Control Limits Recalculation

It should be emphasized that problem solving is oJkn the most difficult

and time-consuming step. Statistical input from the control chart can be
an appropriate starting point, but other methods such as Pareto charts,
cause and effect diagrams, or other graphical analysis can be helpful (see
Ishikawa ( 1976 )). Ultimately, however, the explanations for behavior lie
within the process and the people who are involved with it.
Thoroughness, patience, insight and understanding will be required to
develop actions that will tncasurably improve performance.

61
CHAPTER 11- Section B
Defining '"Out of Control" Signals

Recalculate Control Limits (Range Chart)

When conducting an initial process study or a reassessment of process

capability, the control limits should be recalculated to exclude the effects
of out-of-control periods for which process causes have been clearly
identified and removed or institutionalized. Exclude all subgroups
affected by the special causes that have been identified and removed or
institutionalized, then recalculate and plot the new average range ( R )
and control limits. Confirm that all range points show control when
compared to the new limits; if not, repeat the identification, correction,
recalculation sequence.
If any subgroups were dropped from the R chart because of identified
special causes, they should also be excluded from the X chart. The
revised R and X should be used to recalculate the trial control limits
- -
for averages, X ± A2 R (see Figure 11.6).

NOTE: The exclusion of subgroups representing unstable conditions is

not just "throwing away bad data." Rather, by excluding the points
affected by known special causes, there is a better estimate of the
background level of variation due to common causes. This, in turn, gives
the most appropriate basis for the control limits to detect future
occurrences of special causes of variation. Be reminded, however, that
the process must be changed so the special cause will not recur (if
undesirable) as part of the process.

Find and Address Special Causes (Average Chart)

Once the special cause which affect the variation (Range Chart) have
been identified and their effect have been removed, the Average Chart
can be evaluated for special causes. ln Figure II.6 the new control limits
for the averages indicate that two samples arc out of control.
For each indication of an out-of-control condition in the average chart
data, conduct an analysis of the process operation to determine the reason
for the special cause; correct that condition, and prevent it fron1
recurring. Use the chart data as a guide to when such conditions began
and how long they continued. Timeliness in analysis is important, both
for diagnosis and to n1inimize inconsistent output. Again, be aware that
not all special causes need be undesirable (see Chapter I, Section E and
Chapter II, Section B).
Problem solving techniques such as Pareto analysis and cause-and-effect
analysis can help. (Ishikawa (1976)).

Recalculate Control Limits (Average Chart)

When conducting an initial process study or a reassessment of process
capability, exclude any out-of-control points for which special causes
have been found and removed; recalculate and plot the process average
and control limits. Confinn that all data points show control when

62
 CHAPTER 11 - Scclion B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

compared to the new limits; if not, repeat the identification, correction,

recalculation sequence.

Final Comments
The preceding discussions were intended to give a functional
introduction to control chart analysis. Even though these discussions
used the Average and Range Charts, the concepts apply to all control
chart approaches.
Furthermore, there are other considerations that can be useful to the
analyst. One of the most important is the reminder that, even with
processes that are in statistical control. the probability of getting a false
signal of a special cause on any individual subgroup increases as n1ore
data are rcvicvved.
While it is wise to investigate all signals as possible evidence of special
causes, it should be recognized that they may have been caused by the
system and that there may be no underlying local process problem. If no
clear evidence of a special cause is found, any "corrective" action will
probably serve to increase, rather than decrease, the total variability in
the process output.
For further discussion of interpretation, tests for randomness in data, and
problem-solving, see AT&T (1984), Duncan (1986), Grant and
Leavenworth (1996 ), Juran and Godfrey ( 1999), Charbonneau and
Gordon ( 1978), Ishikawa (1976), Wheeler (1991, 1995), and Ott (2000).

63
CHAPTER 11- Section B
Defining "Oul of Control" Signals

.95 ;.................. .... .

.90 '---+-----+ ---

I>< .. ······················.·.. !.··.·.·.·.·.·.·.·.·.·.

•----------+
. .................. .

-------1
.85 -------i--------
-+-----+---+,
'' ~
w .80
---------- ------
+---+--_
''"'' ---1--
_-+
__ -----+---+---+---------- -
" .. ,
j_...-----
---- - - - ------1----------

----------- 1--- '"" 1---- ------------

--

(!) --.:..J_-----___ -_-·l·-··~~••··:1==F·=-·- ---+-===l·- - - ·-•- -1- -

1===+=~
<( .75 --- ---- ---
- --=t·=·=·---±-:::=c:_:l_c__--.- - - - - --- - - -_: _:-_:_ - - -
---- ~----

a::: .70 -~~:::"-t,=_-_-_=1_~-__ "t.....,.=__~_ ,..............+===-r~--i~-_-__r_

w .65
- '"'
- t - - - + - - --- -- --------
-----------------
" - ..., -
i ---------- '
'"""""'
-- -
'' ---
'''
'

> .60
-~~-=-:-~~ ~;;;:-----:~f; ;:·;:; ; :; ; · -· ·-; ; _; ; ·; ; - ;;;-~~-;;;-;;;- ; ;:,; -, . .:__._._;;,:~~~~::~:~ : :__:__:_: _ : :
I

<(
---~ ____ 1 -~ -~- ' ------------ . -

.55
r----- - - .- ----- --· ----
-- -·
.50 !-------------- -- ----------- -------- -- -

.50 -------- -t ----- -- .--- ---

- - ----- -------r----- "'

=E~==~---. .=~ __j ____:i :j:_J~-~-L=:=~===-

a::: 1
.40
,-=
w .30 ------------ ---- --- -----
~- ·I·
-----
I

. ..
(!) I .
--
- - - - ! - - + - -----1-- ------- --

z .20
,..._ --- , --___

<( '
--+_ _____,_,. --+----+-----
' -
--------------

a:::
. 10
------
SUBGROUP ID I !
------
+-
TIME
Plot new data against the
DATE ongoing control limits.
x1 .80 .60 .65 I -~ ··-·----t-----j----+----+---
I

'°t'' [2'
I

x2 1 75_~ 70 [ .70 I I
"i
x4 1
1 I
x5 i---------- --- - -- -- -" --- ----- ----i-----------------r·------ -- --
i ·~-'-----'----- l----
'

INDIVID~l\L_S_1_,2_-.1~i3~90 1 2_05[=-=t:--l----_-_____:----+;---·-··--·_,+-_···-·-
SUM OF

____A_~-~-~-:-:: ~ [·~~I ·~~ 1~'.~: 1----+-1'-----'--- --- ' - [-

Figure 11.7: Extend Control Limits for Ongoing Control

64
 CHAPTER II - Section B
Defining "Out of Control'" Signals

Extend Control Limits for Ongoing Control

When the initial (or historical) data are consistently contained within the
trial control limits, extend the limits to cover future periods. It might be
desirable here to adjust the process to the target if the process center is
off target. These limits would be used for ongoing monitoring of the
process, with the operator and local supervision responding to signs of
out-of-control conditions on either the location and variation X or R
chart with prompt action (see Figure 11.7).
A change in the subgroup sample size would affect the expected average
range and the control limits for both ranges and averages. This situation
could occur, for instance, if it were decided to take smaller samples more
frequently, so as to detect large process shifts more quickly without
increasing the total number of pieces sampled per day. To adjust central
lines and control limits for a new subgroup sample size, the following
steps should be taken:
• Estimate the process standard deviation (the estimate is shown as
6-"sigma hat"). 19 Using the existing subgroup size calculate:
ec = %, where R. is the average of the subgroup ranges (for

periods with the ranges in control) and d 2 is a constant varying by

sample size n, the number of samples in a subgroup, as shown in the
partial table below, taken from Appendix E:

n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

d, 1.13 1.69 2.06 2.33 2.53 2.70 2.85 2.97 3.08

• Using the table factors based on the new subgroup size, calculate the
new range and control li1nits:

Plot these new control limits on the chart as the basis for ongoing process
control. As long as the process remains in control for both averages and
ranges, the ongoing limits can be extended for additional periods. If,
however, there ls evidence that the process average or range has changed
(in either direction), the cause should be determined and, if the change is
justifiable, control limits should be recalculated based on current
performance.

19
This manual will distinguish between the estimated standard deviation due to the within-subgroup
variation and the total variation by using the subscripts "C" and "P", respectively.

65
CHAPTER I I - Section B
l)efining "Out of Control" Signal~

Final Concepts on "Control" - For Further

Consideration
"A perfect state of control is never attainable in a production process.
The goal of the process control charts is not perfection, but a reasonable
and economical state of control. For practical purposes, therefore, a
controlled process is not one where the chart never goes out of control. If
a chart never went out of control we would seriously question whether
that operation should be charted. For shop purposes a controlled process
is considered to be one where on! y a small percentage of the points go
out of control and where out-of-control points are followed by proper
20 " S
action
. . , ee a1so i,c·igure II . 8 .
Obviously, there are different levels or degrees of statistical control. The
definition of control used can range from mere outliers (beyond the
control limits), through runs, trends and stratification, to full zone
analysis. As the definition of control used advances to full zone analysis,
the likelihood of finding lack of control increases (for example, a process
with no outliers may demonstrate lack of control through an obvious run
still within the control limits). For this reason, the definition of control
used should be consistent with your ability to detect this at the point of
control and should remain the same within one time period, within one
process. Some suppliers may not be ahle to apply the fuller definitions of
control on the floor on a real-ti1ne basis due to i1nmature stages of
operator training or lack of sophistication in the operator's ability. The
ability to detect lack of control at the point of control on a real-time basis
is an advantage of the control chart. Over-interpretation of the data can
be a danger in maintaining a true state of economical control.

20
AT&T (1984)

66
 CHAPTER TT - Section B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

PROCESS CAPABLE OF MEETING SPECIFICATIONS (VIRTUALLY All OUTPUT IS WITHIN THE SPECIFICATIONS), WITH
DIFFERING LEVELS OF VARIATION:

LOWER UPPER
LSL USL
SPECIFICATION SPECIFICATION
LIMIT LIMIT
(LSLI (USL)

SIZE --+- SIZE --+-

PROCESS INCAPABLE OF MEETING SPECIFICATIONS (OUTPUT IS PRODUCED BEYOND ONE
OR BOTH SPECIFICATIONS):

LSL USL LSL USL

I~
SIZE --+-
kNSIZE --+-

STANDARD DEVIATION AND RANGE (FOR A GIVEN SAMPLE. THE LARGER THE AVERAGE RANGE
··R, THE LARGER THE STANDARD DEVIATION-CT):

R R
Process Rangi> Proci>ss Range Process Range
SIZE --+- SIZE --+- SIZE ---+-
FROM THE EXAMPLE (ESTIMATING THE PROCESS STANDARD DEVIATION FROM THE AVERAGE RANGE):

LSL USL

Fi
n = 5
= 0.169 x
= 0.738
LSL = 0.500
d2 = 2.33 USL = 0.900
CT = R/d2 =.169/2.33
= 0.0725 .500

----·.0738

.169
,900

Figure 11.8: Process Variation Relative to Specification Limits

67
CHAPTER 11 - Section B
Defining '·Out of Control'' Signals

This page intentionally leti blank

68
 CHAPTER II - Section 13
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

CHAPTER II - Section 8
Defining "Out-of-Control" Signals
Point Beyond a Control
Limit.

The presence of one or more points beyond either control limit is primary
evidence of special cause variation at that point. This special cause could
have occurred prior to this point.
Since points beyond the control limits would be rare if only variation
frotn common causes were present, the presumption is that a special
cause has accounted for the extreme value. Therefore, any point beyond
a control limit is a signal for analysis of the operation for the special
cause. Mark any data points that are beyond the control limits for
investigation and corrective action based on when that special cause
actually started.
i\ point outside a control limit is generally a sign of one or rnore of the
follovving:
• The control limit or plot point has been miscalculated or mis plotted.
• The piece-to-piece variability or the spread of the distribution has
increased (i.e., worsened), either at that one point in tin1c or as part
of a trend.
• The measurement system has changed (e.g., a different appraiser or
instru1nent).
• The rneasuren1ent system lacks appropriate discrimination.
For cllarts dealing with the spread, a point below the lo\vcr control litnit
is generally a sign of one or more of the following:
• The control limit or plot point is in eTI'or.
• The spread of the distribution has decreased (i.e., becomes better).
• The measurement system has changed (including possible editing or
alteration of the data).
A point beyond either control limit is generally a sign that the process
has shifted either at that one po'mt or as part of a trend (see Figure 11.9).

When the ranges are in statistical control, the process spread -- the within-subgroup variation - is
considered to be stable, 1'he averages can then be analyzed to sec if the process location is changing over
time. Since control limits for X are based upon the ainount of variation in the ranges, then if the
averages are in statistical control, their variation is related to the amount of variation seen in the ranges -
the co1nrnon-cause variation of the system. If the averages are not in control, some special causes of
variation are making the process location unstable.

69
CJIAPTER 11- Seclion B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

Process in control for Averages Process not in control for Averages

(a point beyond the control limits)

I ucLI ............................................................... I UCL '

1 .......................................................... ...

[I] f--''r+..:.,_-\7<'>..cl-~.----;;;J'-""""--"" [I]t=ll.--+-~~--.,,r--A-~

X AND R CONTROL CHART

~
"''''' -
GOTO .80 MM xxx 512 HOURS
"'
BENDC~

9G
IX
w UGL "eo
(!)

i_
10
<( x ;c
"'w
L-'----r-1-- __
G5
> LGL
'°ec l__ j--_i ____
<(

so ! 1--~----- - I ) !- ~----: __ !_____ J___l

Figure 11.9: Points Beyond Control Limits

Patterns or Trends Within

the Control Limits
'rhe presence of unusual patterns or trends, even when all ranges are
within the control limits, can be evidence of the influence of a special
cause during the period of the pattern or trend. This could give the first
warning of an unfavorable condition which should be corrected.
Conversely, ce1tain patterns or trends could be favorable and should be
studied for possible permanent improvement of the process. Comparison
of patterns between the range and average charts n1ay give added insight.
There are situations where an "out-of-control pattern" may be a bad
event for one process and a good event for another process. An exan1ple
of this is that in an X and R chart a series of 7 or more points on one
side of the centerline may indicate an out-of-control situation. If this
happened in a p chart, the process may actuaHy be in1proving if the series
is below the average line (less nonconformances are being produced). So
in this case the series is a good thing - if we identify and retain the cause.

70
 CHAPTER ll - Section B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

Runs
f(uns ~ Each of the following are signs that a process shift or trend has
begun:

• 7 points in a row on one side of the X or R .

• 7 points in a row that are consistently increasing (equal to or greater
than the preceding points), or consistently decreasing.
Mark the point that prompts the decision: it may be helpful to extend a reference line back to the
beginning of the run. Analysis should consider the approximate time at which it appears that the trend or
shift first began.

PROCESS NOT IN CONTROL FOR AVERAGES PROCESS NOT IN CONTROL FOR AVERAGES
(LONG RUNS BOTH ABOVE ANO BELOW THE (LONG RUNS UP)
AVERAGES)

I UCL I ,,., .....................................................,., ... I UGL 1 ...............................................................

[]]~~~.........~~~---r--.1 []] ho.r-A,...--~=--v-----\o~d

~L-~~~~====!!.-~~..J

X AND R CONTROL CHART

BEND Cllf'
SS--

I>< "'
"'
C}
<( x
0::

"'> lCI
co
<(
""
~iO

Figure 11.10: Runs in an Average Control Chart

A run above the average range, or a run up. signifies one or both of the
following:
Greater spread in the output values, which could be from an
irregular cause (such as cquiptncnt inalfunction or loose
fixturing) or from a shift in one of the process elements (e.g., a
new, less uniform rav,11nateria! lot).
A change in the measurement system (e.g., new inspector or
gage).

71
Cl-I APTER II - Scclion B
Defining "Out of Control" Signals

Process not in control for Ranges Process not in control for Ranges
(long runs both above and below (long run up)
the Average Range)

I UCL I ............................................................... IUCL I

[]]~-,-_....~~0>£~~~ []]
[ill] .............................................................. [ill]
'--~~~~~~~~~~~-'

oC

"'w '° L-
(!) '°
z '"
<(
rn

"'
SUBGROUP 10

TIME

SUM OF INUIVIPUALS

AVrnAG~ X
RANGE-R, 20 15 15 05 05 10 20

Figure 11.11: Runs in a Range Control Chart

A run below the average range, or a run down, signifie:-. one or both of
the following:
Smaller spread in output values, which is usually a good
condition that should be studied for wider application and
process improven1ent.
A change in the measurement system, which could mask real
performance changes.

NOTE: As the subgroup size (n) becomes smaller (5 or less), the

likelihood of runs below R increases, so a run length of 8 or more could
be necessary to signal a decrease in process variability.

A run relative to the process average is generally a sign of one or both of

the following:
The process average has changed~ and may still be changing.
The measurement system has changed (drift, bias, sensitivity,
etc.).

72
 CHAPTER 11- Section B
Defining "'OuL of Control" Signals

Obvious Nonrandom Patterns

In addition to the presence of points beyond control limits or long runs,
other distinct patterns may appear in the data that give clues to special
causes. Care should be taken not to over-interpret the data, since even
random (i.e., comn1on cause) data can sometimes give the illusion of
nonrandomness (i.e., special causes). Examples of nonrandom patterns
could be obvious trends (even though they did not satisfy the runs tests),
cycles, the overall spread of data points within the control limits, or even
relationships among values within subgroups (e.g., the first reading
might always be the highest). One test for the overall spread of subgroup
data points is described below.

Distance of points ji-orn R or X : Generally, about 2/3 of the plotted

points should lie within the middle third of the region between the
control limits; about 1/3 of the points should be in the outer two-thirds of
the region. If substantially more than 2/3 of the plotted points lie close to
R or X investigate one or rnore of the following:
• The control limits or plot points have been miscalculated or
misplottcd.
• The process or the sampling method is stratified; each subgroup
systematically contains measurements from two or more process
streams that have very different process averages (e.g., one piece
from each of several spindles).
• The data have been edited (subgroups with ranges that deviated
much from the average have been altered or removed).

lf substantially fewer than 2/3 of the plotted points lie close to R (for 25
subgroups if 40% or fewer are in the middle third), investigate one or
both of the following:
• The control limits or plot points have been miscalculated or
misplotted.
• The process or the sampling method causes successive subgroups to
contain rncasurements fro111 two or more process streams that have
dramatically different variability (e.g., mixed lots of input materials).
If several process streams are present, they should be identified and
tracked separately (see also Appendix A). Figure II.12 shows a
nonrandom pattern for the R chart.

73
CHAPTER 11- SecLion B
Defining "Out of' Control" Signals

Process not in control for Ranges Process not in control for Ranges
(points too close to the Average Range) (points too close to the control Limits)

I UCL I
[]] p."11!:::-~c-:::i--..A:::::-7........'""""'"--:I
@I]
'--~~~~~~~~~~~-'

About 2/.3 ~f p.oints a1-e within middle th:rd of

w
--r--:--1--!
I i
21
control l11111ts l15 ol between .112 and .244)

(!) I . !
z
<
a:'.
SIJ!JGROIJP 10

TIME 10 12 10 '2 10 12
DA.TE 618

Figure 11.12: Nonrandom Patterns in a Control Chart

74
 CHAPTER I! - Section B
Defini11g ·'Out of Control" Signals

Special Cause Criteria

'J'here are several criteria for identifying special causes (see table belovv
and AT&T (l984)). The most commonly used are discussed above. The
decision as to which criteria to use depends on the process being
studied/controlled.

Summary of Typical Special Cause Criteria

--
l l point 1norc than 3 standard deviations 21 from centerline
2 7 points in a row on same side of centerline
--
3 6 points in a row, all increasing or all decreasing
4 14 points in a row. alternating up and down
5 2 out of 3 points> 2 standard deviations from centerline (same side)
6 4 out of 5 points> 1 standard deviation from centerline (same side)
7 15 points in a row within 1 standard deviation or centerline (either side)
8 8 points in a row> I standard deviation from centerline (either side)

Table II.l

Note 1: Except for the first criterion. the numbers associated with the
criteria do not establish an order or priority of use. Determination of
which of the additional criteria to use depends on the specific process
characteristics and special causes which are dominant within the
process.

Note 2: Care should be given not to apply multiple criteria except 1n

those cases where it makes sense. The application of each additional
criterion increases the sensitivity of finding a special cause but also
increases the chance of a Type I error.

In reviewing the above, it should be noted that not all these

considerations for interpretation of control can be applied on the
production floor. There is simply too much for the appraiser to
remember and utilizing the advantages of a cotnputcr is often not feasible
on the production floor. So, much of this more detailed analysis may
need to be clone offline rather than in real time. This supports the oeed
for the process event log and for appropriate thoughtful analysis to be
done after the fact.
Another consideration is in the training of operators. Application of the
additional control criteria should be used on the production floor when
applicable, but nol until the operator is ready for it; both with the
appropriate trainlng and tools. With ti1nc and experience the operator
will recognize these patterns in real time.

21
In this table, "standard deviation" refers to the standard deviation used in the calculations of the
control limits.

75
CHAPTER II ·· Section B
Defining "Ol1l of Control" Signals

Average Run Length (ARL)

Chapter l stated that decisions made based on charts should balance the
risks of Type I errors (over-control, false alarms) to Type II errors
(under-control). A measure of this balance is the Average Run Length
( ARL ).
The Average Run Length is the number of sample subgroups expected
between out-of-control signals. The in-control Average Run Length
( ARL,,) is the expected number of subgroup samples between false
alarn1s.
l
ARI,=-----
' Pr{Typel Error}

The ARL is dependent on how out--of-control signals are defined, the

true target value's deviation from the estiinate, and the true variation
relative to the estimate.

Beiow i5'.i a table of approxin1ale J\ft.L' s for the standRrd Shcvvhart X

control chart \Vi th exceeding the ± 3a x control limits as the only out-of-
control signal.

Shifi in Target
-----------

(]' x ARL

----
0 370.4
0. I 352.9
0.2 308.4
0.3 253. l
0.5 155.2
l.O 43.9
1.5 15.0
2.0 6.3
3.0 2.0
4.0 1.2

l'his table indicates that a n1ean shift of 1.5 standard deviations (of the
mean) would be signaled (on average) by the 15 11' subgroup after the
shift. A shift of 4 standard deviations would be identified within 2
subgroups.

76
 CHAPTER II - Section B
Defining ·'Out of Control" Signnls

This table also shows that a false signal may be indicated for a process
without a shift (i.e .. the process remains in statistical control) every 370
subgroups (on average).
(J"
Since O"x = / , the practical magnitude of the shifts can be reduced by
"\/11
increasing the number of items in each subgroup. Larger subgroups
reduce the size of O" x and tighten the control limits around X .

Alternatively, the ARL 's can be reduced by adding more out-of-control

criteria. Other signals such as runs tests and patterns analysis along with
the control limits will reduce the size of the ARL 's.
The following table is approximate ARL 's far the same chart adding
the runs test of 7-points in a ro\V on one side of X .

Shift in Target

ax's ARL
...- --

0 59.8
0.1 53.9
0.2 41.8
0.3 30.8
0.5 17.9
1.0 8.7
1.5 6.9
2.0 6.1

3.0 2.0
4.0 1.2

As can be seen, adding the one extra out-of-control criterion significantly

reduces the ARLs for small shifts in the mean, a decrease in the risk of a
Type lI en-or. Note that the zero-shift (the in-control) ARL is also
reduced significantly. This is an increase in the risk of a Type I error or
false alarm.
This balance between wanting a long ARL when the process is in
control versus a short ARL when there is a process change has led to the
development of other charting methods. Some of those methods are
briefly described in Chapter Ill.

77
 () ()
8 ~
0~ -~

s~
$HEEH/o_43
n rn
Average and Range Chart ?." ~

C)ubi-r Release LDOU Df()l:E\V Length 5.0 ~/_ 5.0 5 4 subgps/shift xx/x'\:/xx
-
:S- :=
'
C-' v_,
l·.;;;::e,;:;;n:QN-- ·---~A~;<;;;.;;;;;;;~ .•. ProoesoAverag< 5( = 5.050 UCL,.~ () ...fJ8 - --------- - - ,..-
UCLR" 5.09
~~-
\GHI FJGIS PS'.\105 PSl\103 (;RR: 13~~{, {lroces<; R = 'J 41 ~ ~
,. -
!
LCL -- ~ 66'J LCLR 0.00
I
AvM>Q• RO"l!<t

--~y---- -___:~-:-L-- j ;------,-

,__ •\

,,
ce· I\
-;\
\
c: ·- /I\ I/ / ;\ I

~a1:.~ct~t=1~1~1:~t\tift~1=i~;1 2
iil
.....
(,.)

)>
<
(1)
....
Ill
-._] IC
00 (1)
Ill
;,
0:: ~ ~~
" ~~ ~~ ~~- -~=--- -
Q. w !
lJ (!)
Ill
;, z

_J ~ ~- - -~· ~· ·r-'· =~ li
IC
(1) ~
(") 0::
::r 2.5 i -- --'- ±_-- -- -:-:=::::-::.:_
-
Ill -L ..·
.... SUBGROUP lD 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 '9Ti0 II 12 13 14 15 16 i 17 i 18119 [ 20 21 j i
22 23 24125 21> 27 28 j

ti>
TIME xx xx xx xx xx xx xx X'- '._xx ,1 ~~ j ~~ xx xx xx xx xx xx . xx j xx j xx I xx xx _ x.x : xx xx ' xx i xx xx
!-------
DATE xx xx_ xx xx xx xx xx xx xx~, xx_ xx xx_ xx xx i. xx X"._ xx [ x~ ~~~~__'.xx~ ~x_' xx xx xx xx·
" 5.4 4.8 7.2 4.7 4.5 5.7 4.9 6.0 5.9 3.5, 3.915.6 3.8 5.3 3.9 6.517.5 '6.4 5.6 6.3 4.6 3.5 5.2 4.2 5.2 6.4 4.5 5.4
~2 6.2 6.3 4.6 4.3 5,7 4.2 3.7 3,0 3.9 5.7 4.2 45 ~.2 6.J 4.7 4.7 6.414.2 I 6,7 8,l 5.8 5.0 6,l 4.4 5.1 6.4 5.2 5.6
1

x3 5.5 4.0 5.6 6.l) 5.3 2.7 4.3 5 3 6.5 3.2 6.2 5.4 4.9 2.7 5.2 3,7 4.7 4 614.9 5.1 4.7 5.9 3.8 5.013.5 5.9 4.9 3.3
x4 5.1 6.0 5.l 6.R ~.4 ~· 1 ~· ~ ~ 9 2. 7 3.6 _ 6.3 "4.4 5.0 4.~. 4.3 ~: 6. 7 ~-? . 5.4 15.515.I 3.1!_ 4.3 4
5.0 6.; j' :!_.~ 5.4 _ -1·0 __
---··~-- xs 4.8 4.1 cl.6 ~.4 '.'.'1.3 :i.9 :i.4 :'.'13 4.6 5.2 ~f!-~.6 6.4 4.:- -t.I '.'.'!:- 4.7 4.016.9 [DJ.O 3.2 4.1 3.9 5.- 5.~ ~_0 3.8
f SU_l'oll_~~~D!VlDU.ALS 27:!!__~5.2
29, l 27.l ~6_:2
2J.6 22...1 23 ~~J.6
21.2 24.6 2_6 ___:!J,J 23.2 22.2 ~ > 10.0 }4~ 27.2 20.6 24.71129.~2__:_7J
25.91295 2~5 ~2__:_5 24,1__1~~-
I
L
______i:ycHN:OE- X ~O_J 0-t. 5 82 5 42_ S 24 -t.. 72 4 48 :!_ .,0 .4 72 4 24 -t. 9~ 5 30 4 6(1 4 64 4 ..t..:i 4_92 6 00 4 94 5 90 6 ~-t.~ 44 4.12 4 70'. 4~0 ~ l~ 15.90 4 82 4 70 _
RANGE- H. __1.4 2.3 2.§ 2.6__ 1 2 3.2 1.7 ] 0 3.8 ~__]_}_.~ 2 2 3.2 3.6 1.3 2 ~ 2.8 2._:!__ 2.0 l 3._!) 2.4 2.9 2_.3
1
I. I - 1.4 1.5 I 1.5 2~3
---
····--
j
 CHAPTER Tl - Section C
Control Chart Fonuulas:

CHAPTER II - Section C
Control Chart Formulas
Control chart constants for all control charts discussed in this section are
, listed in Appendix E.

Variables Control Charts

Average and Range Charts (.X, R)

Subgroup Average:
- x, +x,- + ... +.xI I •
X -- '
11

n = number of samples in a subgroup

Subgroup Range:
R = xM,,, -x.w 1,, (within each subgroup)

Grand Average:
- - -

X=x 1 +x 2 +... +x,

k
k = number of subgroups used to determine the
Grand A vcrage and Average Range
Average Range:
R = R, + R, + ... .R, :
k .
Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X :

<J,=%,
Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X :

rJ x = ;Ir;;
rJ

79
CHAPTER ll - Seclion C
Control Chart Fonnnlas:

Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits

UCLx =X +A,R LCL, =X-A,R

CL R =R

80
 CHAJYfER 11 - Section C
Control Chart f'onnulas:

This page intentionally left blank

81
 (') (')
SHEET~o
9 ::c
Average and Standard Deviation Chart 3"- )>
'C
--l
f"iWiT>iA.;i' _ _ _ __ . -------;:;;;p:;;;;.,,.,,,,c"o ----·5,.,.M_'""'"'" ____ ------ ··--- __________ ,,_ - """"";J[CN"- - - - - - ------SU0Gii0ur0l•M•"'"' ----,.,,.., ---- ---~--· ··1 Cl
~Al'"

I xxx - - - - ; ; ; ; ; : ; : t : i ; ;•• :;;G;"""'""'""xxx --- M""'''"'"""~~~~--~.;oe-~;;sc-itii~"""""'~;;x --------~-----------'o_U_C

I
__ L_ - I :,1cl)-~--PER DAY lU_1C-~~:_~-O
Prnc~ssAvemgc
X- l.J22 , •"-"-'
Io. ';:;_::_'._~. ---j
'-s__J . ()Ci
-g· w
~ ~
'

ERSYSTEf\,·IXXX xxx xxx I Av•r•goStdDe,S=Ol!O LCLi= 1.014 LCLs"" O.OY.J :J ~

c --

I,: :: IJ_ ~L; _ 1_ i__ i "L~r'__---=~Jl_ _-'.~~1' _ 1~.-1 .r._i1 i LI-.

;::- S:
"T1
?: n
tCi'
c:
....
(1)
!.20 I I
11 __ [

I r 1 ; ; !
--_i -
I ' I I ' ' ' I I

i-l
(!)
..... < 115 I ' '
I '
I '
I
'
..""'
l> ~ L10 ' ( -1-- ! _ -+ !
<
(1)
.... > 1.05 j I I l I

1-1 -
-1-

1 ---1 ,
--r--~
_! --- '

Ill
(Q < 1
:: , __+---- ---,-_-.-
(1)
Ill
:I 90
-1--J··_,_
a. 25()
cxo
N
....
(J)
Ill
"' 200 ___,___
I
---~--
-- --
:I > '"

a. LU 151)
Ill Cl
....
a. Cl
I-
c
(1)
I/)

:s.
Ill
:!. SUBGROUP ID
0 TIME 2
:I
DATE
(")
'::r
Ill
....
....
U)

,,"
SUM OF INDIVIDUALS

AVS:RAGE- X i.15! 1.071' 1.101' 1.14! 118! 1.11 1.10i 111, 1_0611.15; 1_10[ 1.1911.14! 1.13 1.14 1.12 1.08 1_18i 1.0611.13
1·

STDDE\i-S _1361 098 .106 .120' 121 115 _1361.1011 086!.0791.170!_125!.0?0;.107 111 137 074 .0991_059!.141
 CHAPTER IT - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

Average and Standard Deviation Charts (x, s)

Subgroup Average:
- x +x)•· + ... +x
X -- 1 JI'
'
11

11 =number of samples in a subgroup

Subgroup Standard Deviation (Within-subgroup Variation):

Grand Average:
X = XI + X 2 + ... + XI
k
k = number of subgroups used to determine
the Grand Average and Average
Standard Deviation

22
Average Standard Deviation:

s
k

Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X :

Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X:

(j ii = (j;J;;
Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits

CLx =X LCLx =X -A,Y

CL, =:I' LCL, =B,Y

22
Also known as the pooled standard deviation.

83
 SHHTNo
nn
0 -~
Median and Range Chart ~

s~
)>

-c-.:;;;;,c,,,"r.mc"" - - c"~"-'cT'"'""· -------·-- ------- -- -----· · · ·,;p;c;n:,;;;o;;·· ··,-,;;;c;;;;;;cv-- ""'" n rn

xxx LENGTH (HUNDRF.;OTHS SHOWN :_)N CHART) 45_65 +/-0_40 5 PER HOUR 2-9 2-10
"'" -"'
~ -
= 14.85 UCLx~ 18.1 UCL,.-- 10.3 ~
d1'
0
= 11.6 LCL,,-- 0 3 P-
~ §"
20 :-: n

IX ~

15
--i
z
~ •., ~-.~:----~~·~
i- -- ' - -·-·····1,~~ =~•~J§§Ef~[rr~rF=u:!~
!!
cc <(
c: I -~-:I··-·'~·'!-·-!-
f-- --: 'f _.?f.. -' -:
'1" -- - -- -j_ " ~
"':'_ - ~
I ---- ....__ ---- -• : -- -- I ! ,_ ; _! ~ _,_ i i ;
10
iil [_ _ _ ------ ---~ . :
Cl
w - ---- ........
; __:j - [-=[_---:
,_
---:1----1--·
I" ··
-
: --
; '
'
' -
-
_,_ - ---
_,
! ----·-- Jiil:;

~- ~ -:--
_:_: 1

·· -.-:-;:_
;.

•-----•-
' -

--;;·;~,
i .:

•--1-:-.. --
I 2
....t.. 5 .• ..: - - ._ ------ --,--- _ --- -- :--__ -- · -', , _, : -~--:- '·:--i----~
(,J1 I 1----- -- - '-- -- - ·· --· --- -- -- -- T : --- -:----- ---j---c--j

,;
1----

~I --i-_ -.- -------·-·-·- -,. ... ~._ -.:;--, T - _--. - _ _ -·- , • , ; , · · •-----•--·. r - -- _ ,_ "' ______:_ "',_ .. - . •T

-·I 0::: - . i : .
~ i ------ ---- - ;:_- ;'- - - - . -- - _::_ -'---------------~---

a=
00 .----_-------+---------
-"" I w - --- _,_ - -:- ---~--- ~
I (!) 15 ---- -~- ______ :__ ---- ----~ -~ _________ .. _____ ! _ :-------- ---- -r--_:_[:___________ _:__-_-_-
i __ ..:.-'.-. --- ---- ..... ' ; - __________ _, _______ _

~I ~ 10 "--'-- • - ---- _,_, - - , /\·---,:;.;-:-~c.---~~~~t~~---1----

---------:--- :-t------\: /- ·\
tQ I

CD f-s 0:::
"'
'° --

- /. s;::::::
1._--_·7.-.....:
-- ...- -;
-j------+------------------ ----T

' ' / --~- ------

~

~ C""~~;~Pl~ :~~:-~ 1:
1
:t~ :---91: 1~1::-~
en - DATE x1
1~ :'16
_1e_._15E113_13_14 13 15,11IT7
12 - , 2 3 4

~~~-~2
7 8 910 I

11-17i-13 '--9·--1-14 _'__ 6__ 1~ ~_1~14_15;1~--

~-
2 - ,j 4 - - - _,_

__
x2 14 1s T
13 13 1s 13 11 16 17 14 19 10 191 15 13 20 17; 1s 13 14 11 15: 18 15 14 ! 14 : ;
x3 1313-:;5 '13I'16 14 -151--,-----:;4--;7- 14 14 18113-1514:15-;-s. 1'0 16 17 ,-14-r-11 16 16 18 -----~
x4 12 15 15 13[ 14 17 17 14 17 20_ 15.ll 11 1_9,_ 15 12.17] 13: 11 121114 16'1! 17117, 15 14 13
xS 17 17 15 14 ! 17 18 13 14 13 18 17 16 16 ! 13 13 9 . 15 13 14 13 14 1~ 13 14 14 16

_14_~7-· 1~i--1~-~9-1~5 ~4 -:~16

--+---~---,---~-

---- MEDIAN X 14 __ 15_15__ 13 16 14 14 13 14, 15 13 13 -17 15114 16

1
L __ _ ~~~~E-R 5 4 3 2 3 5 6 3 4 6 8 6 ~ j__~---- 3 11 4 7 9 3 4 3 5 2 2 5
 Cl-lAPTER 11- Section C
Control Chan Fonnulas:

Median and Range Charts (ffi; R)

Sample Vaiue: x 1 , ; = l...n (sample size)
Subgroup Median:
X 10 1 is the value of the Oil' element in the sample
when the data are arranged in ascending order

if /1 is odd

if n is even

11= number of elements in a subgroup

k = number of subgroups used to determine the
A veragc Median and Average Range

Subgroup Range:
R = x"'"' - XMia (within each subgroup)

Average Median:
-
Xl'o= '5'/r, + A'2
A'.1
'% + ... ·t _,y/.:.
·%
k ,
Average Range:
R = R, +R, + ....Rk
k
Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X :

itc=%,
Chart Features: 23
Centerline Control Limits

CL.z1~ = ffi LCL-- =

x
ffa_ Kr;J?
-

23
This approach to the Median Chart uses averages in the calculation of the centerline and control
limits. There are other approaches in the literature which do not use averages.

85
 ~Q
-a -''1
"' )>

g~
~='
.,,
SHEET' No 0 VO
~ g
Individuals and Moving Range Chart §- Q·
~~~· l"'EC"'°'TI<l" '°"f>GROOP1SAMPLE5L
s:; ...;
Acid Concentration - % I Production Target 9% min
n
i

- -
i -----1
oc
O'.
 CHAPTER IJ - Section C
Control Chart Fonnu!as:

Individuals and Moving Range Charts (x, MR)

Individual Value: x1, i = l, .. .,k individual values:

Average of Individual Vaiues:

- x 1 + x, + ....r1.
X= .
k
Moving Range:
MR, = lx x, ,1.
1 -- i = 2...k
(Range between current value and previous value.)

Average Moving Range:

MR= 111_1!_,:.!vff!,+._.... MR"-

k-1
Estimate of the Standard Deviation of X :

Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits
CLx = X UCLx = X +E,R LCLx = X -E,R
CLH =R UCLR = D4R LCLR =D,R

Because moving ranges are involved, the points being plotted on the
range chart are correlated. Therefore, valid signals occur only in the
· form of points beyond the control limits. Other rules used to evaluate the
data for non-random patterns (see Chapter II, Section B) are not reliable
indicators of out-of-control conditions.

87
 nn
SH£FNa
§ ~
p Chart ~ >-
2. ~
xxx Functional Requirements 500 Per shift
9~
=; ......
.,,
~ ~
'
:::; VJ
Final Test ETS-2730 GRR = 13% p= 0.0324 UCL,= 0.056 LCL, • 0.009 " ru
::l ;2
c-o
-·
CH.O.RACH'.RtsT!C FnEQUENCY
CA,l;~~°cflY i Gf!A::D ~6TAL TOTX'~~VILD ~

!:
:J
n
Under torqu_e 248559 4 8 8 5 5 5 6 9 6
"T1I Non-start
tC" Leaker
647528
473329
3 5 5 5 2 4 4 3 5
9 4 6 5 1 /, 2 5 6
5; Smoker 1
(lJ

.....
.....
"'CJ
.....
0
"C
0
::i.

··-l+··
(5"
00 ::l
00
z1·-··························
0
~
--•-L~~-'_._L ~T "-----+---
-- - - - -r - ---!------,-,,-,-0
i : ; ' i

g.... -------------
TOTAl UNITS IOOHIFIED \ np-1-
,_________ ;;;-T-,:----':
_
~ ~ PROPORTIO::l:~:::~~!~~I~{~-
-· - - - · · · -
--~
I I
. -Ji
::l I I

~I "~.cc_~~~~+-+-~-+-+--~r-t+---c-~-r-t~...,..~~~,......,_
_j ____ :

:::T .
Q) I

:l. ! UCL p ;-3i:e!_1_n fi_)

05 ---=~=~ct7==±rH±=~=-=7-:-·==r:c~--c-r:c=~±.,...·-~H-:j~
04.,...-~~~~-r-'lr-~c-c~chf-+l<T-r'-l--c-~-c-:7"~-7~~-~~~~~~~~~~r-r-c---r-r--r- LCL'-'P 3\'·EL~;;);)
D3-7P¥'=/=i=?;i;:z""=i=W#~='=;*""'=~¥=9"'=¥=======1=t=¥4==i=!=
02-'==...c.t~:"'J='T'=f=ic===""=Jc=F=\lf=c"=~""~~~~='""/c='====~====~i=c"""'"'=1~r.c~==ct=1~t==
01 ~#~~4~~~~~~~~~p~~"4===+===;=f=io=====
c-·
'
•o ~o

LJf,fl Mvy·
s
-1-- ----------r j -J:jf;"-
,1__ ,J~_, ~~~s_·~'~'~o___
_ I_ _ . . 5 11 '2 1J 1s • 15 i "8 1s 20 1.?-', i 22 :::s T' 22 20 ·--~--__J
 CHAPTER II - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

Attributes Control Charts

Control Charts for Nonconforming ltems24

Attributes charts are part of probability based charts discussed in Chapter
III. ~rhese control charts use categorical data and the probabilities related
to the categories to identify the presences of special causes. 1'he analysis
of categorical data by these charts generally utilizes the binomial, or
poisson distribution approximated by the normal form.
Traditionally attributes charts arc used to track unacceptable parts by
identifying nonconforming items and nonconformities within an iten1.
There is nothing intrinsic in attributes cha11s that restricts them to be
solely used in charting nonconfonning ite1ns. 'I'hey can also be used for
tracking positive events. However, we will follow tradition and refer to
these as nonconformances and nonconforn1ities.

Proportion Nonconforming (p Chart)

Guideline:
Since the control limits are based on a non11al approxin1ation, the
sample size used should be such that np ? 5.

Individual Value
np
/Ji=-' n1 =number of parts inspected;
nI

np 1 = number of nonconfonning items found

Average of' Individual Values

_ np + np, + .... + np,
p= 1
- where k =number of subgroups
nr +112 + .... +nk

- Pi+ P2 + .... + p,
p=------ if all the nt's are equal
k

24
An alternative to these charts is the Individuals and Moving Range Chart (see Wheeler (1995)).

89
CJ-IAPTER II - Section C
Control Chart Fonnulas:

Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits

- -·-·3~p(l-p)
LCLp-]J .
'
Fi:11
'

If the sample size is constant (n)

Control Limits

---3~p(l-p)
Lc'L I'-· p I
-v 11

Constant control limits when the sample size varies

m1n n1
(for situations where 2 0.7 5 )
1nax 11 1

(Ti= average sample size)

LCL = p- 3 ~p(I - p) ( n =average sample size)

p .foi
Example Uses:
• Accept/Reject Decisions with constant or variable subgroup size
First Time Quality (FTQ) results''
Proportion nonconforming
Proportion conforming26
Proportion of items above (or helow) a threshold value
• Judgment Decisions
Proportion of items within a specified category
Proportion of items above (or helow) a threshold value
Proportion Uptime (equipment)

2.~
This is alternatively known as FTC (First Time Capability) and RTY (Rolled Throughput Yield).
26
This chart is sometimes called a q-chart; this is based on the practice of calculating the parameter
q= 1--p.

90
 CHAPTER 11 - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

This page intentionally left blank

91
 SHEET No
dg
np Chart £~
")>

g~
xxx Spot Welds - flaws housing 1 housinglhalf hr. ~::::;
ci1 [/)
Acceptable "'"'"""''""' np =4.04 UCL,, 9.87 LCL,.· "
3 0
~
fREQlJENCY CATEGORY % or ",OF -c --
o
TOTAL GRl\>ID TOTAL TOTAl BUILD
~ ~
Undersi.m__
"Tl Cold weld
ce·
c: .I
Missing
Off-location
··-----

iil
....
co
z
c:
i-
i_, _ _ _ _ _
I
r
I
~-1+-+-++--l
J_,_L1 I -1
3
- . . -- - I -1---=n
u-' -~-·1
C" ) --
r--r--- .. -1---~ __
_l__ __ ,_,_,.
Cl)
..... ,----- '-- L_J, I
'°
N
-z
0

0
'
I
-·· ' '

'
I
I
• .

. '
....... !------·------!'

i
I
'
'

'
I

:I ' I ' I
0 i

l
'

-
! I
0

-i~~=-·i
:I TOTAi. U>l<>S IDENTiFJED ( np)
··----------
2;5 4 3 :i-G'5 OJl5_4 1__:__?·····3 . ·:-6 3 ~---i--4: ~--i-:4'"~6·-- 4 2 ...?.. j 7 I -- :~=!------! .
GRAND TOTAL

0
.....
SAMPLE S<ZE { n]
---------- Ioli
j
i' -1--t !
I
I
! ' : i 1-1 I 1·- ' I
3 ' : ' .. ' ' ;_ . - •-- I ,. .
:I 18 . • ' ' i . .- .. : .. : ; ' :
cc -___ ._: ____ :·j.::::::··--------'.,-.," . ----··;:··--:- -:· -']-" -..... : :_--------·- i·' i ---- -·-----·::· ! -:- :
·········· ' + • ; '
.·.·
. ,___ ,
.··········
16
(") -_' :(_ ;- ·:· ; ___ :_,
.

"i---- ' ' .,

__x-__ : _ :_____ 1 '~ - _:_ -_-:- -_:_ _:_
'''

'
:::T 14 ....... --- -- ......
Q) '' ' ' ...
'
...... - ~- ----:- ; - .'.·---j-·"-
.
.. ' UCL -np --3\:np(1 ___ p)
.... .. ,..
7

..... .
12 '
L ' .... I . ,.
.' ,. . ····.

10 . -----:·_-_ _- -~- --- --: - -I - -. - --

.. : ,. ' .'
·.· . 1-- :'- :---- :· -;-
' LCL~ np 3\ifl/>{1 Pl
8 ' ,,
. ' ' ' ' I ' ' I

-- .,
'
6 --
c ·-
f '- •. j :·.I .. --1 \! I /.'-.
''"
/'- ---;---_:: __ ;_ --· '" l" ; _ _---·- --

4 -1 - ~
'
Y! __ ;__ ", _ ..
:]_, ____ ,_ .... •'\. i ' '
2
I
. '
.... · .. ..

\i ,· : ' [ ··· •.
.
'
'
'f -:
iD ~a
-RH!3 415 6[7 8 9110!11!12,1314]15!16!171181912021:2:,23!24;251 I
·----··
DA!l
~;;;,;;;;--- 1 1 I 1 1 I 1-1 i
1 1 i 1 1 , 1 · 1 1 I 1 • 2 2 c2-L2 , 2 : 2 2 i 2 2 I • : •
! : • '

!
' :;] !
 CHAPTER IT - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

Number of Nonconforming Chart (np Chart)

Restriction:
Requires a constant subgroup size = n
Guideline:
Since the control limits are based on a normal approximation,
the sample size used should be such that np ~ 5

Individual Value:
np 1 n =number of parts inspected;
np =number of nonconfom1ing items found
Average oflndividual Values:
- "1'1 +np, + .... +npk
np=
k

Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits:

- - np - ~
UCL,,P = np + 3 np(l- - ) = np + 3 np(l - p)
n

- /_. llf' ......... ~..- . - - -

LCL,,I' = np - 3. /np(l - - ) c" np - 3,j np(l - p)
v 17

Example Uses:
• Accept/Reject Decisions with constant subgroup size
First Time Quality (FTQ) results
Number nonconforming
Number confonning
Number of items above (or below) a threshold value
• J udg1nent Decisions
Number of items within a specified category
Number of items above (or below) a threshold value
Number of times a condition occurs

93
 SllEE~N~
S1 9
u Chart " :»
£~
--------,,.,,."°"---- ,,.n tn ,,
~-·
" "'~ · · '"'"""''m" ''"""""m -,,_•EIGROUPSA~eL<>IZE m•OUE><G~ -~:;TE;i;-;;;m·--·-

X~X IM"'~'"''J''""""R'"-_____ M•'~oM•~ ~~~~,~~~f~~-~~,~~=.~lEMA>•msB"'"''"' --

8 boxes Per day ~
:::;; :::
EW.noN-"" ______ Al 'Tl '
c (/;

.,,
Dock Audit '
CHARAC1ERlS11C
--·-· ·r· VS-845
· -· -----·-··
Acceptable
PREQLJENCY
"'''"'"""' u = 1.89 UCL,= 3.35 LC" 0.43
.r-~-;;---·-;:;;l;--1
I
a a§.
~
TOTAl GR,.,._ - - - -- ;; n
ca'
c: nd013
·--·--· 3:132.6 CATEGORY .' .••...•·.·.·'"..'..ITT
... "... ...lAl.•B.· o.•: ·.. .-.•.
' . ···'"
- - - ----------------
.., nd018 __:i__ . 7. . 11-.
1-1T.-...•......6C......----- ..... . .•. -+-··
(!) , r1i:Jo4:J . 2 1: 9
:-1 nd050
... c----- ... - _____l_?_ 1 1 '•--1--,-------1----·-
2
CD i nd084 u !

• • · vr721 4
t vr1050 1
_____ j
3 _'fr_1_(JQ1
g 'Jf'1942
----j
..... vr3017 2

,.'°
....
0
z
0
i'l . ..... •·. .
·--r=t: . . :: . . :
0 : : ' - ; ' - i
:I
Q ·--1 : ' :
: i
~• iu) _8 _17 18[_~-~-~? t!_~_:_e :14~_1__!J1_311~ 116 22: ' ; j__ _______ GRANDTOfAL

:I '°"'°"'IT''' 8.8 9!8 8'7!7 8 8 817 8 9 9

ITE~;;-;~RUN-1;- 1~ow11r·1:·92.911.3[:2-_-7:0Z1:s:-2-:111.9l1.~ 1.8 2-4.
i
co - - - - ;
-g
(Urn) - ! ! ;

1 1""'_____ : ! : : : ; : i ---- ; i ; -

..... ! --- - :--- -: - 1- ---- ----- : - - : __ - _: - - -- : -: -- --- - ~- I : :_ ------- --

C
::::s 40
. ' ;· _; - -!- : ' ·:· ---
-·
- ,,---__ :-:__ ;_-:-.:-
·-----------1----

:--::·-:-:·'---
.: ; ----;---- ------
---
----'."'.-_[--~--- __ ;____ .,,
'.

---j-----1---;·-·: __ _-·
----
-i-

;:
1------

1--
: '·

_:____ ,_
:

-'.-
----

_, -- :.;-:.-_;---; ,
1----:

- :u
(") 3_0 ';,: t:___ ----- ,, ------ """ --- -;_______ '"" UCL u 3~~-
':s' -_- -_, ___ -- ;. --- ---- ---- ' -;-- --- "' --:- ,-- :" . : _-
Q) --- ---- --- -- ---- __ ,_ ------- - --- --- - -- --
..... ; --;; -;:· ·::; 1 :·;:.---- - -/'-•
-- - ---'-----~---~--:
- 2.0 •u
L_/J=-· V./. '~:r . . . . • ~--- LCL - ii 3~· -~--

1.0

1--- JO !fo

i !)AIE FP,b 9
 CHAPTER 11- Section C
Conlrol Chart Fonnulas:

Number of Nonconformities per Unit Chart (u Chart)

Guideline:
Since the control limits are hased on a normal
approximation, the sample size used must be large enough
so that the number of subgroups with c = 0 is small.
Individual Value:
c
u, =-'- c, = number of nonconformities found in sample i;
n,
n, = is the sample size
Average oflndividual Values:

u = u, +u,~ + .... +u,_

_ h

k
Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits

CL,,= II UCL.~,, = -11 +);, - 3~-

3Jfi =u+ -.
n.
i
n i

LCL,, =u- 3 ff. =u- ~-;;;{f

-y n1
3

For constant control limits when the sample size varies

· situat10ns
(tor · where .min~ 2 0.75 )
n1ax n 1

Control Limits:

- 3Jfi - {if ( n =average sample size)

UCL,, =u + Jfi =u +3~1f

Lc'L -
-U
II
- - -Jfi
---
3
U-. - .
~
3~
-
1
n ( n =average sample size)
Example Uses:
• Accept/Reject Decisions with variable number items per unit
Quality rates for specified unit designation
Average number (rate) of nonconformities per unit
Average number (rate) of itetns within one or more categories
• Judgment Decisions
Average nu1nber (rate) of items within one or more categories
Average number (rate) of items above (or below) a threshold
value per unit

95
 SHE;"-rNo
nn
c :r:
c Chart e"
£~
8 ,,
n tn
xxx '"
-·· VS-1041
All Flaws

Acceptable Pmc•»• Av•,•s• C = 7 ,56

Whole bolt

UCL,-
Each bolt

15.81 LCL, --
""0 -
,.....
"TI '
(/;
- rn
3"'
c -·
CHARACTERISHC FREQUE~CY '>• O!' %OF so§
n

2
TOTAL GF<A>IDTOTAL TOTALBUELD
'Z

I vr721
---t~! ~ 4~-~~f~ ~rrr i.lJ~=!.~:~;~~r~1r
1
::!! I' vr1 050 1 1 1
CC i vr1901 3 3 4
=; vr1942 1 1 3
CD Vr3Qi7 2 7 8' 1 3 3 2_ 4 i 5 5' 2 . -- ! 11 24 51

~---------- I

'°°'

GRAND lUTAL
_, __
'
.

I
F
UCL C"3\'c
12
I \ i ( \ /\ I _.
10
8
\i \'I \ J '\
LCL--C" 3\"C
6
I IH ' I I\ I A• I i\.i. if' I
----
4
IV. I I\ /\1 J/\j!\J! '

I : 1
1· I ···-"'
,,
:..=!' ' V· . '\··1· 1
\'~:11 '< _,[
,
2 I '

2 3 4 5 2 3 2 3 4 5 2 3 ~ 2 3 4 5 2 3 --- _i__ _j_

I
DArE
g 10 10 10 10 ;o 10 16 16 16 10 113 16 c7 17 11 '7 rn 1s 1s 1s ,s 1q 1q 1Q
 CHAPTER II - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

Number of Nonconformities Chart (c Chart)

Restriction:
Requires a constant subgroup size = n
Guideline:
Since the control li1nits are based on a nonnal approxi1nation, the sample
used must be large enough so that the number of subgroups with c =()is
small

Individual Value:
c, =number of nonconformities found in sample; i = l,K ,k

Average oflndividual Values:

-
c = c1 + c2 +·· .. +ck k = number of samples
k

Chart Features:
Centerline Control Limits
UCL, =c +3~
LCLc =c-3~

Example Uses:
• Accept/Reject Decisions with a constant number items per unit
Quality level for specified unit designation
Total number of nonconfonnities per unit
rfotal nutnber or items within one or more categories
• Judgment Decisions
Total nu1nber of iten1s within one or more categories per unit
Total number of items above (or below) a threshold value per
unit
Total nu1nber of ti1nes a condition occurs \Vi thin a unit

97
CHAPTER II - Section C
Control Chart Formulas:

This page intentionally left blank

98
 CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

99
CHAPTER lll
Other Types of Control Chans

CONTROL CHARTS

Upper Control Limit

Center Line

Lower Control Limit

1. Collection
• Gather Data and plot on a chart.
2. Control
• Calculate trial control limits from process data.
• Identify special causes of variation and act upon them.
3. Analysis and Improvement
• Quantify common cause variation; take action to reduce it

These three phases are repeated for continual process improvement

Figure 111.1: Control Charts

I 00
 CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

Introduction
There are several types of control charts other than those discussed in the
previous chapters. Most of these charts were developed to address
specific process situations or conditions which can affect the optimal use
of the standard control charts. A brief description of the more co1n111on
charts will follow below. This description will define the charts, discuss
when they should be used and list the formulas associated with the chart,
as appropriate. If more infonnation is desired regarding these charts or
others, please consult a reference text that deals specifically with these
types 01· control charts.

Probability Based Charts

Probability based charts belong to a class of control charts that uses
categorical data and the probabilities related to the categories. The
analysis of categorical data generally uses the hinomial, multinomial or
poisson distribution. Examples of these charts arc the attributes charts
discussed in Chapter 11 Section C. The attributes charts use the categories
of "good" and "bad" (e.g., conforming and nonconfrnming). However,
there is nothing inherent in any of these forms (or any other forms) that
requires one or more categories to be "bad."
The problem is that users tend to apply by example, rather than by
knowledge. This is as n1uch the fault of professionals and teachers, as it
is the student's. There is a tendency to take the easy way out, using
traditional (and stereotypical) examples. This leads to a failure to realize
that quality practitioners once had (or were constrained to) the tolerance
philosophy; i.e., make it "to print" (or "close enough").

Stoplight Control
With stoplight control charts, the process location and variation are
Red controlled using one chart. The chart tracks the number of data points in
the sample in each of the designated categories. The decision criteria are
Yellow
based on the expected probabilities for these categories.
Green
A typical scenario will divide the process variation into three parts;
warning low, target, warning high. The areas outside the expected
process variation ( 66") are the stop zones. One simple but effective
control procedure of this type is stoplight control which is a semi-
variables (more than two categories) technique using douhlc sampling. In
this approach the target area is designated green, the warning areas as
yellow, and the stop zones as red. The use of these colors gives rise to
the "stop! ight" designation.

101
CHAPTER III
Other Types of Control Charts

Stop
------1
Warning
L1~L Stop
Warning
>-----11,_ LSL

Target
Target
Warning
Stop
Warning

Stop
1----~usL 1--------11- USL

Figure 111.2: Stoplight Control

With this categorization the process can be controlled by identifying and

charting the proportion of data points designated as "warning" within a
satnple. rrhe apportionn1ent (lJ(;. warning) controls the sample size and
frequency required. Of course, this allows process control only if the
process distribution is knownc The quantification and analysis of the
procest-; requires variables data.

The focus of this tool is to detect changes (special causes of variation) in

the process. That is, this is an appropriate tool for stage 2 activities 27
only. At its basic implementation, stoplight control requires no
computations and no plotting, thereby making it easier to implement than
control charts. Since it splits the total sample (e.g., 5) into a two-stage
sampling (e.g., 2, 3), this approach can signal out-of-control conditions
with the same or better efficiency than a control chart with the same total
sample size (see Heaphy and Gruska (1982)).
Although, the development of this technique is thoroughly founded in
statistical theory, it can be implemented and taught at the operator level
without involving mathematics.

27
See Chapter I, Section F.

102
 CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

The assumptions in stoplight control are:

• The process is in statistical control.
• Process perfonnance (including tneasurcment variability) 1s
acceptable.
• ·rhe process is on target.

Once the assun1ptions have been verified by a process pcrforrnance study

using variables data techniques. the process distribution can be divided
such that the average ± 1.5 standard deviations is labeled as the green
area and the rest of the area within the process distribution is yellow.
Any area outside the process distribution (the 99.73%.· range) is labeled
red.
Ir the process distribution follows the normal form, approximately
86.6% of the distribution is in the green area, 13.2% is in the yellow area
and 0.39f. is in the red area. Sin1ilar conditions can be established if the
distribution is found to be non-normal.

for control equivalent to an X and R chart with a sample size of 5, the

steps ror stoplight control can be outlined as follows:
1. Check 2 pieces; if both pieces are in the green area, continue to run.
2. If one or both are in the red zone, stop the process, notify the
designated person for corrective action and sort material. When setup
or other corrections arc made, repeat step# 1.
3. If one or both are in a yellow zone, check three more pieces. If any
pieces fall in a red zone, stop the process, notify the designated
person for co1Tectivc action and sort n1atcrial. When setup or other
corrections are made, repeat step# I.
If no pieces fall in a red zone, but three or more are in a yellow
zone (out of 5 pieces) stop the process, notify the designated
No person for corrective action. When setup or other corrections are
made, repeat step# 1.
If three pieces fall in the green zone and the rest are yellow,
continue to run.
Measurements can be made with variables as well as attributes gaging.
Ce11ain variables gaging such as dial indicators or air-electronic colu111ns
' are better suited for this type of program since the indicator background
can be color coded. Although no charts or graphs are required, charting is
recommended, especially if subtle trends (shifts over a relatively long
period of time) are possible in the process.
'
3 ·-5
In any decision-making situation there is a risk of making a wrong
Yellow?,
decision. With sampling, the two types of errors are:
• Probability of calling the process bad when it is actLrnlly good
(false alarm rate).
• Probability of calling the process good when it is actually bad
(miss rate).

103
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

In addition to these two measures, the sensitivity of the sampling plan

can be quantified. Sensitivity refers to the ability of the sampling plan to
detect out-of-control conditions due to increased variation or shifts from
the process average.
The disadvantage of stoplight control is that it has a higher false alarm
rate than an X and R chart of the same total sample size.
The advantage of stoplight control is that it is as sensitive as an
X and R chart of the same total sample size.
Users tend to accept control mechanisms based on these types of data
due to the ease of data collection and analysis. Focus is on the target not
specification limits - thus it is compatible with the target philosophy and
continuous improven1ent.

Pre-Control
An application of the stoplight control approach for the purpose of
nonconformance control instead of process control is called Pre-
control. It is based on the specifications not the process variation. Its
origins can be traced to work by Frank Satterthwaite from Rath & Strong
at the Jones & Lamson Machine Company in 1954. 28

The assumptions in pre-control are:

• the process has a flat Joss function (see section on l,,oss Function, in
Chapter IV.)
• process perfonnance (including measurement system variability) is
less than or equal to the tolerance.

The first assutnption means that all special sources of variation in the
process are being controlled. The second assumption states that 99. 73%
of the pieces being produced are within specification without sorting.
If the foregoing assumptions are satisfied, the tolerance can be divided so
that Nominal ± 1/4 Tolerance is labeled as the green area and the rest of
the area within the specification is yellow. The area outside the
specifications is labeled red. For a process that is normal with Cr, Crc
equal to 1.00, approximately 86.6% of the pieces are in the green area,
13.2% are in the yellow area and 0.3% are in the red area. Similar
calculations could be done if the distribution was found to be non--normal
or highly capable.

The pre-control sampling uses a sample size of two. However, before the
sampling can start, the process must produce 5 consecutive parts in the
green zone. Each of the two data points are plotted on the chart and
reviewed against a set of rules.

" See Bhotc (1991) and ASQ Statistics Newsletter Vol 05 No 2 Feb. 1984.

I 04
 CHAPTER lll
Other Types of Control Charts

t A
'

Norn - % Toi LSL Norn - % Toi LSL

Norn - \14 Toi Norn - \14 Toi

Nominal - - - - - Nominal

Norn + \14 Toi Norn+ \14 Toi

Norn +%Toi USL Norn+% Toi USL

I
v
Figure 111.3: Pre-Control

When using a pre-control the following rules should be used.

• l'wo data points in the green zone - continue to run the process.
• One data point in the green zone and one data point in the yellow
zone - continue to run the process.
• Two yellow points in a row (same zone) -- adjust the process
• Two yellow points in a row (opposite zone) - stop the process
and investigate
• One red data point - stop the process and investigate.
Every tin1e the process is adjusted, before the sa1npling can start the
process must produce S consecutive parts in the green zone.

Pre-control is not a process control chart but a nonconfotmancc control

chart so great care must be taken as to how this chart is used and
interpreted. Pre-control charts should be not used when you have a Cp.
Cpk greater than one or a loss function that is not flat within the
specifications (see Chapter IV).

105
CHAPTER JI1
Other Type:-. of Control Charls

Loss Functions

Target Target
"Flat" Loss Function Sensitive Loss Function

The benefit of pre-control is its simplicity. The disadvantage of pre ..

. control is that potential diagnostics that are available with normal process
control methods are not available. Further. pre-control does not evaluate
nor monitor process stability. Pre-control is a compliance based tool not
a process control tool.

106
 CHAPTER lT1
Other Types of Conlrol Charts

Short-Run Control Charts

Standard control chart approaches are well suited for long production
runs. l lowever there arc processes that only produce a small number of
products during a single run (e.g., job shops). Further, the increasing
focus on just-in-time (JJT) inventory and lean n1anufacturing n1cthods is
driving production runs to become shorter. Fro111 a business perspective,
producing large batches of product several times per month and holding
it in inventory for later distribution, can lead to avoidable, unnecessary
costs. Manufacturers now are 1noving toward JTT -· producing much
smaller quantities on a more frequent basis to avoid the costs of holding
"work in process" and inventory. For example, in the past, it 1nay have
been satisfactory to make 10,000 parts per month in batches of 2,500 per
week. Now, customer demand, flexible manufacturing methods and JIT
requirements might lead to making and shipping only 500 parts per day.
To realize the efficiencies of short-run processes it is essential that SPC
methods be able to verify that the process is truly in statistical control,
(i.e., predictable), and be able to detect special-cause variation during
these "short runs."
Wheeler (1991) describes four requirements for an "Ideal State" of
process operation essential for cotnpeting in this arena:
a. "The process must be inherently stable over time.
b. The process must be operated in a stable and consistent maimer.
c. The process aim must be set and maintained at the proper level.
d. The Natural Process Limits must fall within the specification limits."

Effective control charts can be constructed even with s1nall atnounts of

data. Short-run oriented charts allow a single chart to be used for the
control of multiple products. There are a number of variations on this
theme. Among the more widely described short-run charts are: 29

a. Difference or Deviation from Nominal (DNOM) X & R chart.

Production processes for short runs of different products can be
characterized easily on a single chart by plotting the differences
between the product 1neasure1nent and its target value. These charts
can be applied both to individual measurements and to grouped data.

29
Caution should be used when subgroups are formed from small populations or when the subgroups
use measurements taken over extended periods of time (see Appendix A). Wheeler ( 1991) discusses
evaluating the data with an Individuals and Moving Range (I & MR) chart to ensure that important
process behavior information is not being masked by the subgrouping.

107
CHAPTER !JI
Other Types of Control Charts

.--- ,-=-==T='ype~o8=:=~=M=TC=ha=rt=f=o=r=P=a: ';:"~=Y=';37"=' s=7=6=0=,=8=2+2=a-=n-~:':':1'9_:=3-=6':_0' ::=-=-=r«•-,,~ I

1:1'~1···········
-?b -·--~- '
X~o.107

l.Cl~-2.414

.....
c--~~------

1 2 7 8 m 11 u 13 14

'-r---~~__c:;···l·-------~-- LCL~O

' ' ' Sample

11 12 13 14

Figure 111.4: DNOM Control Chart

b. Standardized X & R chart.

The DNOM approach assumes a common, constant variance among the
products being tracked on a single chart. When there are substantial
differences in the variances of these products, using the deviation from
the process target becomes proble1natic. In such cases the data n1ay be
standardized to compensate for the different product means and
variability using a transformation of the form:

z. = ·---'--
x --
(}

This class of charts sometimes is refe!1'ed to as Z or Zed charts.

In some short-run processes, the total production volume may be too
small to utilize subgrouping effectively. In these cases subgrouping
measurements may work counter to the concept of controlling the
process and reduce the control chart to a report card function. But when
subgrouping is possible, the measurements can be standardized to
accommodate this case.
c. Standardized Attributes Control Charts.
Attributes data samples, including those of variable size, can be
standardized so that multiple part types can be plotted on a single chart.
The standardized statistic has the fonn:
Z ~ Difference from Mean
' Standard Deviation
For example, au statistic for defect rate would be standardized as:
z.::::::: U1-U
' '1u In
This method also applies to np, p, c and u charts.

l08
 CHAPTER fll
Other Types of Control Charts

See Farnum ( 1992), Juran and Godfrey ( 1999), Montgomery ( 1997),

Wheeler ( 1991) and Wisc and Fair ( 1998) for detailed discussions and
examples of short-run applications.

Charts for Detecting Small

Changes
There are situations \vhcre sn1all changes in the process n1ean can cause
problems. Shewhart control charts n1ay not be sensitive enough to
efficiently detect these changes, e.g., less than 1.5 a. l'he two
alternative charts discussed here were developed to in1prove sensitivity
for detecting small excursions in the process mean. While the typical
Shewhart chart uses only the infonnation supplied by the most recent
datum point, the Cumulative Sum (CUSUM) and the Exponentially
Weighted Moving-Average (EWMA) charts exploit the infonnation
available in accumulated, historical data. See Montgomery ( 1997),
Wheeler ( 1995) and Grant and Leavenworth (l 996) for in-depth
discussions of these methods and comparisons with the supplemental
detection rules for enhancing the sensitivity of the Shewhart chart to
small process shifts

CUSUM (Cumulative Sum) Chart

A CUSUM chart plots the cumulative sum of deviations of successive
sample 1neans frotn a target specification so that even n1inor permanent
shifts (0.5 sigma or below) in the process mean will eventually signal
that a shift has occurred. For larger shifts, Shewhart control charts are
just as effective and take less effort.
'fhese charts arc 1nost often used to n1onitor continuous processes, such
as in the chemical industry, where small shifts can have significant
effects.

Vmask Chart for Coating Thickness

0.0 Target=O

-0.2

E -0.4
~
-~ -0.6
~
~ ·0.8
a -LO

-1.2

-1.4·"-r-~-~--+--~~~--~--r
5 10 15
......
20 23 25 30 35

Figure 111.5: CUSUM Chart with V-Mask

109
 CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

The CUSUM chart evaluates the slope of the plotted line. A graphical
tool (V-mask) is laid over the chart with a vertical reference line offset
from origin of the V passing through the last plotted point (see Figure
Ill.5). The offset and angle of the arms are functions of the desired level
------- of sensitivity to process shifts. An out-of-control
VmaskChartforCoatingThickness
con d"ll10n
· · "f"1cant process sh"f)
( e.g., a s1grn ·
1 t. 1s
-- - ------ - -------- -----i----
indicated when previously plotted points fall
outside of the V-mask arms. These arms take the
place of the upper and lower control limits.
-0.25
~
The chart in Figure III.5 indicates that a process
-0.75
shift occurred around the time of sample 14 or 15.
Due to the nature of this chart, the shift was not
detected nntil sample 23 was plotted. When the
V-mask v. ;< positioned on prior data points, all
..
·1.25
-.--~~--rcc-~-~---r
5 10 15 2021 25 30 35
samples fell within the control limits, so there was
...,~
no indication of an out-of-control situation.
ln comparison, an Individual and Moving Range (X, MR) plot of the
same data (Figure 111.6) does not detect the process shift until sample 27.

I/ mR Chart for Coating Thickness

=============:::;~===============:--i UCL=l.0536

.,• 1.02

.,
-·------·-·--··------------------ - A
> X=0.9702
0.96

"":~ 0.90
""
~
0 LCL=0.8869

0.84
9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37
Observation

0.12

•mc UCL=0.1024

::! 0.08
m
c
·~ 0.04
>: MR,,.,0.0313

0.00 L;=~~===:==:::;===~==:;:::==:;:::~=:;:::==~=:_-::;-_::-::-::-::-:_J LCL=O

5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37
Observation

Figure 111.6: X, MR Chart

A tabular CUSUM is an alternative to the Y-mask approach. See
Montgomery ( 1997) for a discussion of this procedure.

110
 CHAPTER !JI
Other Types of Control Chart:-;

1e

EWMA {Exponentially Weighted Moving Average)

Charts
An EWMA Chart plots moving averages of past and current data rn v
which the values being averaged arc assigned \\'eights that decrease
exponentially fro1n the present jnto the past. 3° Consequently, the average
values are int1uenced more by recent process pcrfonnancc, 31 The
exponentially weighted moving average is defined by the equation:
z, ~ ?ex,+ (1- ?c)z1 _1
where il is the weighting constant O < A- < \
t is an index number (I ~ 1... ),
x 1 is the current samp!e value, and
z, is the current weighted moving average.

An initial value, z0 must be estimated to start the process with the tirst sarnp~e.

Through recursive substitution, successive values of Z 1 cun be

determined from the equation:
t--1

z, =A.}]1-,.!)' x, 1 +(1-?c)' Zo for 0 < }, < 1

1-~o

The value of A is determined from tables or graphs based on Average

Run Length (ARL) performance. Some authors also consider control
limit \vidths other than three-sigma \Vhen designing an EWJ\1A chart.
But, current literature indicates that this approach may not necessary.
The EWMA chart becomes an X chart for A = l .O. See Montgomery
( l 997) and Wheeler ( 1995) for detailed discussions.
The advantage of this chart is its ability to efficiently detect small
process mean shifts, typically less then 1.5 sigma, and it can be used with
an autocorrelated process 12 with a slowly drifting mean.
Its disadvantage is its inability to efficiently detect large changes in the
process mean. In situations where large process mean shlfts arc
expected, the Shewhart control chart is recommended.
A common use of the EWMA is in the chemical industry where large
day-to-day fluctuations are common but may not be indicative of the la;k
of process predictability.
Figures HI. 7 and l![,8 are EWMA and X, MR plots of the same data. The
EWMA ehmt detects a mean shift at sample 29, but there is no indication
of this shift on theX, MR chart

111
In contrast, the CUSUM chart gives equal weight to the previous data.
11
Another type of time weighted control chart is the Moving Average chart (MA chart). This approach
is based on a simple, unweighted moving average. See Montgomery ( 1997).
" See Appendix A.

111
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Chans

Valid signals occur only in the form of points beyond the control limits. n
Other rules used to evaluate the data for non-random patterns (see
Chapter II. Section B) are not reliable indicators of out-of-control
conditions.

EWMA Chart of Viscosity

80.8
UCL,,,80.688
80.6

80.4

80.2
<
>: 80.D X=BO
~
79.8

79,6

79.4
LCL=79.312

---------
79.2
4 7 10

-
13
. .. 16
...,,
----------
19

-------
22 25 28 30

Figure 111.7: EWMA Chart of Viscosity

- - - ----- --------

82.Sj\
1::: ------.-~
X, MR Chart of Viscosity
C-:--=-=--=--=-=----======== =======---_-_- un~s3

.... 78.ll
I

c.;:==;=====---,:.:..:..::=:::::;=---~---- -- --J LCL~77

13 16 19 l2
Observation ''
·--~----------------------
utL~3.686

.!' '
..f '
~ '
,j ==-=====·=---=---=-=--=--=~='=:'=:'c======~cc- LCL~o
1 to 13 16 19 22 25 2830
Obs10rvat1Dn

Figure 111.8: X, MR Chart of Viscosity

EWMA and CUSUM essentially arc equivalent in their ability to detect
the presence of assignable causes that result in a small shift in the mean.
However, the EWMA also can be used to forecast a "new" process mean
for the next time period. These charts can be useful to signal a need to

33
Because moving averages are involved, the points being plotted are correlated (dependent) and
therefore detection of special causes using pattern analysis is not appropriate since they assume
independence among the points.

112
 CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Cunlrol Charts

adjust (maintain) a process. But they are not appropriate as tools for
process improvement (see Wheeler ( 1995)).
Multivariate forms of these charts. MCUSUM and MEWMA, have been
developed. See Lowery et al. ( 1992) and Lowry and Montgomery
( 1995).

Non-Normal Charts
If the underlying distribution of a process is known to be 11011-norrnal,
there arc several approaches that can be used:
• Use the standard Shewhart control charts with appropriate sample
size.
• Use adjustment factors to modify the control limits to reflect the non-
normal form.
• Use a transfo1111ation to convert the data into a (near) normal form
and use the standard charts.
• Use control limits based on the native non-normal fon11.
The approach which is used depends on the amount the process
distribution deviates from nonnality and specific conditions related lo the
process.

Shewhart Control Charts

Although the sensitivity and risks associated with the standard control
charts have been analyzed by assu1ning the process distribution was
nonnal, Shewhart's development was not based on an assumption of
normality. His goal was to develop a tool useful for the economic control
of quality. Shewhart control charts can be used for all processes.
--~ _-:; -- ------ __ -: .,;;:.-::. _- ---- However, as the process distribution deviates from normality, the
sensitivity to change decreases, and the risk associated with the Type I
i error increases.
--_,_ ~_,,---j
- 0

For many non-normal process distributions, the Central Limit Theorem

can be used to mitigate the effect of non-normality. That is, if a
sufficiently large subgroup size is used,:14 the Shewhart control chart can
be used with near normal sensitivity and degree of risk.

34
For cxarnple, see VYhecler ( 1995).

113
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types or Control Charts

Central Limit Theorem

Let X,,K , X,, be a set of 11 independent random variates from the same
arhitrary prohahility distribution P ( ):1 ~K j x 11 ) with 1nean fix and
variance CY x .

c:onsider the average X,,

11

The distribution of X,, approaches the normal distribution N (µx, ~' )

as n~=

The "rule of thumb" is that the range chart should be used with
subgroups of size fifteen or less. The standard deviation chart can be
used for all subgroup sizes.

Adjustment Factors
When a large subgroup size is not possible, the control limits of the
Shewhart control charts can be modified using adjustment factors to
co1npensate for the effect of the non-normality. Since non-normal
distributions are either asymn1etric, h<lve heavier tails than the normal
distribution, or both, use of the standard ± 3 sigma control limits can
increase the risk of false alarms, especially if pattern analysis for special
causes is used.
In this approach the non-nmmal distributional form is characterized by
its skewness or kurtosis or both. Tabled or algorithmic correction factors
are then applied to the normal control limits."

This approach requires an initial capability study with a sample size

sufficiently large to effectively capture the non-normal form.

15
For example see: Burr, l. W., (1967), Chan, L.K., and Cui, Heng, J, and (2003) Pham, H., (2001).

114
 CHAPTER JJl
Other Types or Control Charts

For this and the following approaches, the process should be studied
periodically to verify that the distributional form has not changed. Any
significant change in the distribution is an indicator that the process is
being affected by special causes.

Transformations
An alternative to the adjustment factors is to convert the data instead of
the control limits. In this approach, a transformation is determined which
transfonns the non-normal process distribution into a (near) norn1al
distribution. Exa1nples of transfonnations:\(, used in these situations are
the Johnson family of transformations and the Box-Cox transfonnations.
The selected transfonnation is then used to lransform each datum point
and the standard Shewhart control chart methodologies are used on the
converted data.

For this approach to be effective, the transformation must be valid. This

typically requires a capability study with a sample size sufficiently large
to effectively capture the non-normal fom1. Also, because the
transfonnations tend to be mathematically complex, this approach is only
effective and efficient when i1nplc1nented using a computer progran1.

Non-Normal Form
There are situations when the above approaches are not easily handled.
Examples of these situations occur \Vhen the process distribution is
highly non-normal and the sample size cannot be large, e.g., when
tracking equipment reliability. In these situations a control chart can be
developed using the non-normal fonn directly to calculate the chart
control limits.

16
For example, see Johnson ( 1949) and Box and Cox ( 1964).

115
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

;·:-::-::-::-:::-::: --:::-=-:.-~-=-=-=-.:-:-:-:::-: - -~ UCL

~'CJ~V~'Y~-jl
~~==--~~---"~--------------------------·
Mean

LCL
-- .

10 20

In the example of tracking equipment reliability, a Time-to-Failure Chart

with a subgroup size of one can he used. The control limits are based on
the exponential distribution with parameter 8 equal to the mean time
between failures (MTBF). Jn general, control limits for this approach are
selected to be the 0.135 and 99.865 percentile points of the underlying
distribution.
Like the other approaches above, for this approach to be effective, it
typically requires a capability study with a sample size sufficiently large
to capture the non-normal fo1111. Advantages of this approach are that the
data can be plotted without complex calculations and it provides more
exact control li1nits than adjustrnent factors.

Multivariate
Multivariate charts are appropriate when it is desired to simultaneously
control two or more related characteristics that influence the performance
of a process or product Their advantage is that the combined effect of
all variables can be monitored using a single statistic. For
instance, the combined effects of pH and temperature of a
part washing fluid may be linked to part cleanliness measured
by particle count A multivariate chart provides a means to
detect shifts in the mean and changes in the parameter
relationships.
A correlation matrix of variables can be used to test whether
a multivariate control chart could be useful. For the
multivariate approach to be viable the matrix entries should
indicate that the variables are sufficiently correlated.
Three of the most popular multivariate control chart statistics
are Hotelling's T2 , the Multivariate Exponentially-Weighted
Moving Average (MEWMA) and the Multivariate
Cumulative Sum (MCUSUM).
A multivariate chart reduces Type I error, i.e., false out-of-
control signals arc less likely to occur compared to usiug
univariate charts to make decisions separately for each
variable.
The simplicity of this approach is also its disadvantage. An
out-of-control conditiou can be detected using a siugle

116
 CHAPTER Tll
Other Types of Control Charts

statistic but the analysis of the charted results may not tell which variable
caused it. Additional analysis using other statistical tools may be
required to isolate the special cause(s). Sec Kourti and MacGregor
(l 996).
Multivariate charts are mathematically complex, and computerized
implcn1entation of these methods is essential for practical application. It
is important, however, that the use of appropriate techniques for
estimating dispersion statistics be verified. See Wheeler (l 995 ),
Montgomery (1997) and current literature such as Mason and Young
(200 l), for detailed discussions of multivariate control charts.

Other Charts

In Chapter I, Section E, a Case 3 process was defined as one not in

statistical control but acceptable to tolerance. Special causes of variation
are present, the source of variation is known and predictable but may not
be eliminated for economic reasons. However, this predictability of the
special cause may require monitoring and control. One method to
detennine deviations in the predictability of special cause variation is the
Regression chart.

Regression Control Charts

Regression charts are used to monitor the relationship between two
correlated variables in order to determine if and when deviation from the
known predictable relationship occurs. These charts originally were
applied to ad1ninistrative processes but they have also been used to
analyze the correlation between many types of variables.
Regression charts track the linear correlation between t\VO variables, for
example:
• Product cost versus weight.
• 1broughput versus machine cycle time (line speed).
• Temperature versus pressure.
• Dimensional change relative to tooling cycles.

For example, if a tool has constant wear relative to each cycle of the
process, a dimensional feature such as diameter (Y) could be predicted
based on the cycles (X) performed. Using data collected over time this
linear relationship can be modeled as

Y=b 0 +h1 X

When X equals zero cycles, the predicted Y is equal to b 0 . So b 0 is the

predicted dimension from a tool never used.

117
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

b 0 and hi are estimated using the equatlons for sin1ple linear regression.
The chart is constructed by drawing the line Y = /J11 + /J1X which is the
estin1ate for Y = b0 -+- h1 X and corr1puting the 95% or 99(Yc predictive
interval. The predictive limits computed are curved lines with the
- .
tightest point at X . Often they are replaced with the Y ± 3s in order to
tighten the control limits at each extreme for X .

Points that exceed the control limits indicate tooling which has a tool life
which is significantly different from the base tool life. This can be
advantageous or detrimental depending on the specific situation.

A line is only one type of correlation between variables. Regression

charts can be applied to any relationship for which the mathematical
model can be determined.

Care should be taken in making predictions (extrapolating) outside of the

range of the original observations. The accuracy of the regression model
for use outside of this range should be viewed as highly suspect. Both
the prediction interval for future values and the confidence interval for the
regression equation become increasingly wide. Additional data may be
needed for model validation.

Discussion on confidence intervals can be found in Hines and

Montgomery ( 1980).

Residual Charts
An alternative approach to the Regression (~hart is to chart the residual
values ..From the regression equation, the residual value ( E) is Y - .f .
A chart of the residual values could be treated in the same manner as an
Individuals chart with X equal lo zero.

The Residuals Chart and the Regression Chart are technically equivalent
and differ only in their presentation.

This approach would be more useful and intuitive when the variable
relationships are more complex.

Autoregressive Charts
Control chart methods generally assume that the data outpnt from a
process are independent and identically distributed. For many processes
this assumption is not correct. Data fron1 a titne series, data taken

118
 CHAPTER lil
Other Types of Control Charts

sequentially in time, are often serially dependent. These types of

processes have output that are autocorrelated and analysis with standard
charting 1nethods tnay result in erroneous conclusions.
One common approach to contend with serial dependency is to take
samples far enough apart in time that the dependency is not apparent.
This often works in practice hut its effectiveness relies on postponing
sample collection and may extend the sampling interval longer than is
appropriate. Also, this approach ignores information which may be
useful or even necessary for accurate prediction in order to utilize
techniques which were not designed for that type of data.
Autoregressive Moving Average (ARMA) is a method of analysis for
data from a time series and it results in the prediction or future
observations based on their dependency on past observations. Processes
which drift, walk or cycle through time are good candidates for time
series analysis and an ARMA method may be appropriate.
The autoregressive (AR) model is defined by

X, =;+¢1X,_ 1 +¢2 X 1_ 2 K + E1 (AR)

The cun·ent value observed is equal to a constant, a weighted
combination of prior observations and a random component.
The moving average (MA) model is defined by

X, =µ-B1E1_1 -B2t:, 2 K+E1 (MA)

The current value observed is equal to a constant, plus a weighted

combination of prior random adjustments and a random component.
The ARMA model is a combination of the AR and MA models.

X, =;+¢1X,_ 1 -·B1E, 1 + ¢2 X, 2 -B2 E, 2 K +E, (ARMA)

Box and Jenkins defined the terminology ARMA(p,d,q) to define subsets

of the full ARMA model, where p is the number of autoregressive
parameters, d the number of times the data is differenced (defined
belo\v), and q is the nun1ber of moving average parameters.
So, ARMA(l ,0,0) is the first order AR model without differencing

ARMA(O,O, I) is the first order MA model without differencing

X 1 =µ-81E1_1 +E,.

And ARMA( l, I , I) is the first order ARMA model differenced once

For the first order AR and ARMA models the parameter ¢ must be in
the interval -1<¢<1 for the model to be stationary, i.e., does not
diverge to infinity. (There are similar restrictions for the ¢ 's in the
higher order models.) For processes that are not stationary, the data will

119
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charls

need to be differenced. Differencing removes the serial dependence

between an observation and another lagged observation.

YI =X I --X 1-k

The differenced observation Ls equai to the cu1Tent observation 111inus the

observation made k samples prior The data should only be differenced
if the model is not stationary. Most data from manufacturing processes
will not need differencing. The processes do not diverge to infinity.
The next step is to determine the nu1nber of autoregressive and moving
average parameters to include in the model. Typically the number of
¢ 's or B's needed will not be more than two. ARMA(l ,d,0),
ARMA(2,d,0), ARMA( l ,d, 1), ARMA(2,d, I), ARMA( 1,d,2),
ARMA(2,d,2), ARMA(O,d, 1), ARMA(O,d,2) are the common
combinations and it is feasible to estimate them all before selecting the
best.
To estimate the para1neters use Non-Linear Estimation.
Once the model is determined and stationary, and the parameters arc
estimated then the next observation can be predicted from past
observations. For example (ARMA( 1,0, 1)):

X, =q+¢1X,_ 1 --B1E, 1

The residual is calculated by

E, = X, -X,
and the values for E will be independent normally distributed random
variables and may be analyzed using an Individuals Chart or Residuals
Chart For a n1ore co1nplete discussion see Box, Jenkins and Rcinsel
(1994).

120
 CHAPTER lll
Other Type~ of Control CharLs

Zone Charts

Chapter II, Section B, Table]], I provides various rules for detecting out-
of-control signals. The first four rules can be easily implemented with
manual control charts, but the latter rules do not lend themselves to rapid
visual identification since they require the determination of the number
of standard deviations a plotted point is from the centerline. This can be
aided by dividing the control chart into "zones" al 1, 2, and 3 standard
deviations from the centerline.

-- - UCL

Centerline

3 6 9 12 15 18 2l 24 27 30
Sample
These zones arc sometimes referred to as "sigma" zones (sigma here is
the standard deviation of the distribution of the sample averages, not the
individual values). The zones assist in the visual detennination of
whether a special cause exists using one or more of the tabled criteria.
See Montgomery ( 1997) and Wheeler ( 1995).
3.0

1.5
Q)
:i
g 0.0

-1.5

-3.0
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30

Sample

This division of the control cha11 can be coupled with run sun1s analysis
of control chart to produce the Zone Control Chart. The run sums control
chart analysis was introduced by Roberts (1966) and studied further by
Reynolds ( 1971 ). This approach assigns a score to each zone. The score
a1 , assigned to the region R+ 1 is nonnegative; and the score, /31 assigned
to the region R_ 1 is nonpositive. A typical set of scores are:

121
CHAPTERlll
Other Types of Control Charts

Zone Score

[µx, µx +a.,)

[µx +a-,, µx + 2 0-x) r +2

!·---·-·-------·------ +---·----------··
I [µx +20-,, µx +30-x)
I
J +4
0 or +I

[ [µx +30-x, =) _ J - - - + - 8------

The four regions placed symmetrically below the centerline arc assigned
the corresponding negative scores.

A zone control chart is a hybrid between an X (or Individuals) chart

and a CUSUM chart. lt analyzes a cumulative score, based on the zones.
The cumulative score is the absolute value of the sum of the scores of the
zones in which the points are plotted. Every time the centerline is crossed
the cumulative score is reset to zero.

Zone Chart
3.0
UCL
1.5

Centerline

-3 0 8 CL
Cum Score o o 2 o o o 4 s 10 12 12 12 o 2 4 s s s 10 10 12 2 2 4 s s 4 s 10 s

9 12 15 18 71 24 27 30
Sample

A point is out of control if its cumulative score is greater than or equal to

8. Thus, the analyst does not need to recognize the patterns associated
with non-random behavior as on a Shewhart chart. With the scoring of 0,
2, 4, 8 this method is equivalent to the standard criteria 1, 5, and 6 for
special causes in an X (or Individuals) chart and is more stringent than
criterion 8. With the scoring of I, 2, 4, 8 this method is equivalent to the
standard criteria I, 2, 5, and 6 for special causes in an X (or Individuals)
chart and is more stringent than criteria 7 and 8. As shown in the figure
above, trends (criterion 3) can also he detected depending on the start
and stop of the trend.
Zone control charts can be modified to eliminate the point-plotting
process; the points are plotted in the zone not to a scale. 1'hus, one
standard zone control chart can fit most needs; when to act on a process
is determined by the charting procedure.

122
 CHAPTER III
Other Types of Control Charts

Scores Zone Chart

8
+3 SDev =UCL
4
+2 SDev
2 2
+1 SDev
0
X = Centerline
0 2
-1 SDev
2
-2 SDev
4
-3 SDev = LCL

81
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
Sample

The zone chart can be used with a weighting scheme to provide the
sensitivity needed for a specific process. For example, one set of weights
(scores) can be used during the initial phase for detecting special causes.
T'hen the weights could be changed when the process is in control and it
is more important to detect drift.
The efficiency of the zone control chart is demonstrated by comparing its
average run lengths with those of standard control tests. For the chart
divided into scores of 0, 2, 4, and 8, the zone control chart performs '"
well as or better than Shewhart charts (see Davis et al. ( 1990)).

123
CHAPTER Ill
Other Types of Control Charts

This page intentionally left blank

124
 CHAPTER IV

Understanding Process Capability

and Process Performance for Variables Data

125
This page intentionally left hlank

126
 CHAJYrER lV
Understanding Process Capahility and Process Perfonnance for Variables Data

Introduction
The output of a stable process can be described by ils statistical
distribution. The process must be stable (in statistical control) in order
for the distribution to be useful for predicting future results." A
distribution is described in tern1s of characteristics (statistics) that are
calculated fro1n measure1ncnts of samples taken fron1 the process.
The statistics of 1nost frequent interest are estimates of distribution
location (or center) and spread relative tu the custo1ncr requirements.
Typically, the location is estimated by the sample mean or sample
tncdian. Spread usually is estimated using the sa1nple range or satnple
standard deviation.
Process centering and spread interact with respect to producing an
acceptable product. As the distribution moves off center, the "elbow
room" available to accommodate process variation (spread) is reduced.
A shift in process location, an increase in process spread or a
con1hination of these factors may produce parts outside the specification
limits. A process with such a distribution would not be qualified to meet
the customer's needs.
This section addresses some of the techniques for evaluating process
capability and performance with respect to product specifications. In
general, it is necessary that the process being evaluated be stable (in
statistical control). A discussion of process variation and the associated
capability indices has little value for unstable processes. However,
reasonable approaches have been developed to assess the capability of
processes exhibiting systematic special causes of process variation, such
as tool wear (see Spiring, F. A. ( 1991)).
In addition, it is generally assutned thnt. the individual readings fro1n the
subject processes have a distribution that is approximately nor1naL-°K
This section will discuss only the more popular indices and ratios:
• Indices of process variation-only, relative to specifications: C'P· and
Pp.
• Indices of process variation and centering co1nhined, relative to
specifications: c·11k. and p pk·
• Ratios of process variation-only, relative to specifications: CR and
PR.

NOTE: Although other indices are not discussed in this manual, see
Appendix D and References for information on other indices.

Finally, this section describes the conditions and assumptions associated

with these process measures and concludes with a suggestion as to how
these measures might be applied toward enhancing process
understanding within the framework of continual process improvement.

7
.i See Chapter I, Sections C-F.
:IK For non-nor1nai distributions and autoco1Telated processes sec Chapter IV, Section B.

127
CJ;APTER JV
lJnclcrstanding Process Capability and Process Perfonnance for Variables Data

This manual recognizes both the tnlsunderstanding and controversy

surrounding the fundamental concepts and definitions regarding process
"Control", "Capability", and "Performance". It is not the purpose of this
manual to fully resolve these issues, but to expose and discuss the1n to an
extent that allows each reader the opportunity to develop a better
understanding of them in order to provide value and knowledge for
continual process improvcn1cnL

128
 CHAPTER IV
l.lnders!anding Process l:apahility and Process Performance for Variahlcs Data

This page intentionally left blank

129
CHAPTER IV - Section A
Definition of Process Tenns

23.5
• •
23.0
"t
• 1 •• c
0
:;:::;
cu
.,
ti
·;::

~
:I
22.5
>"'

22.0
•
Within Subgroup Variation
•
•
•
-
~
cu

•• ~ ~
""
21.5
Subgroup Average ••
15 16 17 18 19
subgroup

23.5

23.Q I

' c
0
:;:::;
cu
., ·;::

~
:I
"' 22.5
>

22.0
""
I
Between Subgroup V a r i a t i o n /
J
21.5 L._.....,..

15 16 17 18 19
subgroup

Figure IV.1: Within- and Between-Subgroup Variation

130
 CHAPTER IV - Section A
Definition of Process Terms

CHAPTER IV - Section A
Definitions of Process Terms

Process variation has various aspects:

• Inherent Process 'lariation - That portion of process variation due to
com1non (systcn1atic) causes only.

• Within-subgroup Variation ( <5c) ·-This is the variation due only to

the variation within the subgroups. If the process is in statistical
control this variation is a good estirnate of the inherent process

variation. lt can be estimated from control charts by %, /c., .

or

• Bettveen-su.hgroup \lar;a1i'on - This is the variation due to the

variation between subgroups. If the process is in statistical control
this variation should he zero.

• 1'otal Process \lariation ( <5p) - This is the variation due to both

within-subgroup and between-subgroup variation. If the process is
not in statistical control the total process variation will include the
effect of the special cause(s) as well as the common causes. This
variation may be estimated bys, the sample standard deviation, using
all of the individual readings obtained from either a detailed control

chart or a process study: 61' = s = *'(x.-:o'

L.t 1
where x. 1s an
.
i n-1 I

lndivldual rending, Xis the average of the individual readings, nnd

n is the total number of individual readings.
• Process C,apahility - 1'he 6 d range of inherent process variation,
for statistically stable processes only, where er is usually estimated
R/ s/
by Id, or I c, .
• Process Pe1j(;rm.ance -~ The 6 6- range of total process variation,
where er
is usually estimated bys , the total process standard
deviation.

If the process is in statistical control the process capability will be very

close to the process performance. A large difference between the
capability and performance er indicates the presence of a special
cause(s).

131
CHAPTER IV - Section A
Definition ol' Process Terms

Process Measures for Predictable Processes

Indices-
Bilateral Tolerances
'I'his section discusses com1nonly used indices where the specification
has both an upper and lower limit'"

CAUTION: The indices discussed below are valid only when the process
is stable (in statistical contra~. If the process is not in statistical control
· then these indices can be very misleading. as can be seen by Figure
IV.4.

CP: This is a capability index. It compares the process capability to the

maximum allowable variation as indicated by the tolerance. This index
provides a n1casure of ho\v well the process will satisfy the variability
USL - LSL USL - LSL
requirements. c,,is calculated by cp = ---- - (-;)
6<T, 6 R;
/ d,
CP is not impacted by the process location. This index can be calculated
only for two-sided (bilateral) tolerances.

C,,L This is a capability index. It takes the process location as well as the
capability into account. For bilateral tolerances CP, will always be less
than or equal to cf'.
C'p1: -:.; Cp
Cpk will be equal to Cp only if the process is centered.
Cpk is calculated as the as the minimum of CPU or CPL where:

USL-X USL-X
CPU= and
3!Tc
3(%,)
-
X-LSL X-LSL
CPL=
3!Tc
3(%J
Cpk and C1, should always be evaluated and analyzed together. A C1, value
significantly greater than the corresponding c,," indicates an opportunity
for i1nprove1nent by centering the process.

As discussed in Chapter II, Section A, process analysis requires that the data have been collected
using measurement systcm(s) that are consistent with the process and have acceptable measurement
syste1n characteristics.

132
 CIIAPTER TV - Section A
Definition of Process Terms

PP: This is a performance index. It compares the process performance to

the maximum allowable variation as indicated by the tolerance. ]'his
index provides a measure of how well the process will satisfy the
variability requirements. P11 is calculated hy

USL-LSL USL-LSL
fry/' 6s

P,, is not impacted by the process location.

Ppk: 'I'his is a performance index. It takes the process location as well as

the performance into account. For bilateral tolerances P,,, will always be
less than or equal to P". Pp1 will be equal to P" only if the process is
centered.
p pk <
-
pp

Pp 1 is calculated as the as the minimum of PPU or PPL where:

USL X USL-X
PPU and

- -
PPL= X -LSL = X -LSL_
3CY r 3s

23.5
• •
f "'

.,
23.0
"
~\/.
• Q_Q

(])
(.)

ti~~
c
2 22.5 ro
>"' E
Capability -- • .....
.g
•
Cpk
•
!
(])
22.0. • 0..
...• -e-

21.5
••
15 16 17 18 19
subgroup

Figure !V.2: Cpkand Ppk Comparison

133
CHAPTER JV - Seclion A
Definition of Process Tenns

Ppk and PP should always be evaluated and analyzed together. A PP value

significantly greater than the corresponding }Jpk indicates an opportunity
for improvement by centering the process.

If the process is in statistical control the process capability will be very

close to the process performance. A large difference between the C and P
indices indicate the presence of a special cause(s). See Figure IV.3 and
IV.4.

CR CR: This is the capability ratio and is simply the reciprocal of C,,;
1
CR=-.
GP

PR PR: This is the performance ratio and is simply the reciprocal of PP;
1
PR=-.
Pp

NOTE: Example calculations for all of these measures are shown in

Appendix F.

A parts-per-·rriillion (ppm) nonconformance rate ls so1neti1nes used as a

PPM supplemental measure of process capability. To estimate the
nonconfonnance rate using capability index inforn1ation, a prohability
distribution of the data must be defined. While the normal distribution
often is used for this purpose. this is an assumption that should be
validated using a goodness-of-fit test before proceeding further. The
nonlinear relationship between the capability index and the proportion
nonconforming should be understood in order to make correct inferences
(see Wheeler ( 1999) for a detailed discussion of this subject).

134
 CHAPTER IV - Section A
Definition of Process Tenn~

Xbar - R Chart: Immature Process

2]2f- ~

122 4 __ -~~~=~ ~- __ _____ _ _ -v~~

UCL=22. 779

LCL,,,22.283

2201~-·~-·~~~~~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
/

4 i2 14 16 18 20 22 24
sample

V\r· I~~, ,
o.s· !\

~/\-~,/\,"'v}
---------------------------------
2 4 6 8 10 12
Sample
14 16 18 10 22 24

Xbar - R Chart: Predictable Process

~ 2281 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ I UCL -22 7789

~''61
~ 'j
~A.
/Y-.../
.
v r I . \
'
X-22.SJOR

, 224t- ______________________________ _ . . LCL,,,22.2827

2 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Sample

~ --------------------------------- I UCL=0.909

!: :1 II
f L~·····
04 R-0 410

i.n 0.2 I vr--

0.0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ -· - I LCL"'O
2 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Sample

Note that the Range charts are identical since the

within subgroup variation is the same for both processes

Figure IV.3: Comparison between a Predictable and Immature Process

135
CHAPTER lV - Section A
l)efinition of Process Tenns

Immature Process -- out of statistical control

23.5 f
• • • I
~ • t f ~ ~ •
23.0 i! : • •
~
• •
• • •
• ••
! • I •
2" I ~·& !• •· • ·•
22.s 1'- - - --.-t-- ~ °t-,.-~- - -~ ~- -- - - --.- - - - - --f-0-Y- - - - --1 x
.
=

..
Ppk ~ 0. 71
Cpk ~ 1.80 ~ !
;

I•
e • e I
.
• • e • •

•
I •
•
•'

• ~•
II

• • •
•
el
! ~i
•• •
I
••
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
~,------.--,----------,---,~~~~~~~~~~~-~TJ
I ···1 ,.-1--.-.---,------,--·-r-..
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
subgroup

Process below has same within subgroup variation

as above but no between subgroup variation

23.5

•
!···· ..
23.0
• • • • • I

Ppk
Cpk =
~ I. 71
1.80
~
Ri 22.5
>
--- ~-~-~ --~ --~------t.-~-'-
® •
!
·~··,
•1'
•
••

•
• •
•
. •••
~
• '
11;1
•
_.., _ ------•- -t x
-~
••••
• ~ @ ~ •
. . , , • .0
®
:
~-.-.
••
• •
~~=
•
• • • ••
•
• • • • •• •
22.0- • ••

21.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
subgroup

Process is in statistical control

Figure IV.4: Cpk and Ppk Values Produced by a Predictable and Immature
Process

136
 CHAPTER TV - Seclion A
Definition of Process Terms

Indices-
Unilateral Tolerances
This section discusses co1nmonly used indices where the ,<;pecification
has either an upper or loYver limit hut not both.

C1 : This is a capability index. It compares the process capability to the

maximum allowable variation as indicated by the tolerance. This index
has no meaning for unilateral tolerances.
If the product characteristic has a physical limit (e.g., flatness cannot be
less than zero), a C1, could be calculated using the physical limit (0.fl) as
a surrogate lo\ver limit. But this number will not have the sa1ne
relationship to CP 1 as it does in the bilateral case.

C1 k: This is a capability index. It takes the process location as well as the

capability into account. With unilateral tolerances vvith a physical li1nit,
cf!~ can be less than, equal to or greater than C".

c,,k is directly related to the proportion nonconfonning produced by the

process. It is equal to CPU or CPL depending whether the tolerance is an
USL or a LSL where:
=
CPU~ USL-X
3 1R )
\ d,
=

P 1,: This is a perfonnancc index. It compares the process perfonnancc to

the maximum allowable variation as indicated by the tolerance. This
index has no meaning for unilateral tolerances.
If the product characteristic has a physical limit (e.g., flatness cannot be
less than zero), a Pp could be calculated using the physical limit (0.0) as a
surrogate lower limit. But this number will not have the same
relationship to Ppk as it does in the bilateral case.

137
CHAPTER lV - Section A
Definition of Process Tenns

Pl', is directly related to the prop01tion nonconforming produced by the

process. It is equal to PPU or PPL depending whether the tolerance is an
USL or a LSL where:

__, USL-X=
l~l 11 =----
3s

PPL= X-LSL
3s

An alternate notation for P11 k in the case of unilateral tolerances is Ppku or

Pl'u depending on whether the limit is an USL or LSL

CR: This is the capability ratio and is simply the reciprocal of Ci•. As
CR such, this index has no 1neaning for unilateral tolerances.

PR: This is the performance ratio and is simply the reciprocal of Pp. As
such, this index has no meaning for unilateral tolerances.
PR
NOTE: Example calculations for all of these measures are shown in
Appendix F.

138
 CHAPTER JV - Section B
Dc1;cription of Conditions

CHAPTER IV - Section 8
Description of Conditions
It is appropriate to point out that process variation and process centering
are two separate process characteristics. Each needs to be understood
separately from the other. To assist in this analysis it has become
convenient to combine the two characteristics into indices, such as CP,
['pk or PP, Ppk. These indices can be useful for:

• Measuring continual improvement using trends over time.

• Prioritizing the order in which processes will be improved.
The capability index, c,,,, is additionally use!Ul for determining whether
or not a process is capable of meeting customer requirements. 'fhis was
the original intent of the capability index. The pcrfonnance index, Pr"
shows whether the process performance is actually meeting the customer
requirements. For these indices (as well as all of the other process
measures described in Chapter IV, Section A) to be effectively used, the
COND/110NS which surround them must be understood. If these
conditions are not 1net, the measures will have little or no ineaning and
can be misleading in understanding the processes from which they were
generated. The following three conditions are the minimum that must be
satisfied for all of the capability measures described in Section A:
• The process from which the data come is statistically stable, that is,
the normally accepted SPC rules must not be violated.
• The individual measurements from the process data form an
40
approximately nonnal distribution.
• 'I'he specifications are based on customer rcqujrements.

Commonly, the computed index (or ratio) value is accepted as the "true"
index (or ratio) value; i.e., the influence of sampling variation on the
computed number is discounted. For example, computed indices c,,, of
1.30 and 1.39 can be from the same stable process simply due to
sampling variation.
Sec Bissell, B.A.F. (1990), Boyles, R. A. (1991) and Dovich, K A.
(1991) for more on this subject.

411 C'
1 ·or non-non11a1, d'istr1'but1ons,
, see t he pages t h at t'o ll ow.

139
CHAPTER IV - Scclion B
Description of Condilions

41
Handling Non-Normal and Multivariate Distributions
Although the normal distribution is useful in describing and analyzing a
wide variety of processes, it cannot be used for all processes. Some
processes arc inherently non·-nonnaI, and their deviations fro1n norn1ality
are such that using the normal distribution as an approximation can lead
to erroneous decisions. Other processes have multiple characteristics that
are interrelated and should be modeled as a multivariate distribution.
Of the indices described above, Cp, P1,, CR, and PR are robust with
respect to non-normality. This is not true for C"k' and Prk·

Relationship of Indices and

Proportion Nonconforming
Although many individuals use the Cf!i:, and Ppr indices as scalar-less
(unit-less) metrics, there is a direct relationship between each index and
the related process parameter of proportion nonconforming (or pp1n).
Assuming that CP > I, the capability index relationship is given by:

rrorortion 11011conj(1rmi111i = 1- J: e-r;r dx

where z,. = 3C pf, and

Cl'1 = min{CPU, CPL}

Similarly, Pp1: i~ related to the perfon11ance proportion nonconfonnance
through:
- -3Ppk
Lp -

With this understanding of C11ti and Ppt. indices for non-norn1al

distributions can be developed with the same relationships between the
index and the process proportion nonconfom1ing.
The determination of these indices for non-normal distributions requires
extensive tables or the use of iterative approximation techniques. They
are rarely calculated without the assistance of a computer program.

Non-Normal Distributions
Using Transformations
One approach is to transform the non-normal form to one that is (near)
normal. The specifications are also transformed using the same

41
As discussed in Chapter JI, Section A, process analysis requires that the data have been collected
using measurement system(s) that are consistent with the process and have acceptable measurement
system characteristics.

140
 CHAPTER IV - Section B
Description of Conditions

parameters. The Cpk' and PP~ indices are then determined in the
transfonned space using standard calculations based on the nonnal
distribution.
'I'wo general transfonnation approaches which have gained support are:

• Box-Cox 'fransfo1mations
The methods of analysis of designed experiments arc "appropriate
and efficient when the models are (a) structurally adequate, and the
(supposedly independent) errors (h) have constant variance and (c)
2
are normally distrihuted." " Box and Cox ( 1964) discussed a
transformation which reasonably satisfies all three of these
requirements. This transformation is given by:
1
YV = X '

where -5 S A S 5
and A = 0 for the natural log transformation
A = 0.5 for the square root transformation
Although this transformation was developed with the focus of the
analysis of designed experiments, it has found an application in the
transfonnation of process data to nonnality.

• John;.;on T'ransforn1ations
In 1949, Norman L. Johnson developed a system of transformations
which yields approximate normality. 43 This system is given by:

SB w= log[-.11-_x_)
x)
Bounded

SL w-/ou(x)
- <'l .,, Log Normal

Su lV = sinh- 1 (x) = log (x+ 1+ ~ y2 + I) Unbounded

As in the case of the Pearson Family of distributions (see below), this

system of curves encompasses all the possible unimodal distributional
fonns; i.e., it covers the entire feasible skervness-kurtosis plane. It also
contains as a boundary form the familiar lognormal distribution.
1-Iowevcr, in the general case, the Johnson curves are four parameter
functions.

42
Box, G. E. P., Hunter, W. G., and Hunter, J. S., Statistics f(!r Experimenters, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1978, pg.239.
43
See Johnson (l 949).

141
CHAPTER IV - Section B
Description of Conditions

Non-Normal Distributions
Using Non-Normal Forms
Non-nonnal forms model the process distribution and then determine the
proportion nonconfonning, i.e., the area of the non-normal distribution
outside the specifications.
A common approach to the modeling of the non-normal distribution is to
use the Pearson family of Curves. The most appropriate member of this
family is determined by the method of matching moments; i.e., the curve
with skewness (SK) and kurtosis (KU) that match that of the sampled
distribution is used as a model for the underlying form. As in the case of
the Johnson Transformation System (see above), this family of curves
encompasses all the possible unimodal distributional forms; i.e., it covers
the entire feasible SK-KU plane.
To calculate the non-normal equivalent to the P,,,
index, the non-normal
form (f (x)) is used to determine the proportion nonconforming, i.e.,
the area of the non-normal distribution outside the upper and lower
specifications:
11
Pr.= (_ f(x)d.x and

Pu = [ 11 f(x)dx
T'hese values are converted to a z value using the inverse standard nonnal
distribution. That is, the z1 and zu values in the following equations are
determined such that:

and

Pu re-[;)' dx
''Ii

p = min { z1 , zu }
Then
pk 3

Although the standard calculation of PP is a robust estirnate, a 1nore exact

estimate can be found using the convention that the process spread is defined as
the range that includes 99.73°k of the distribution (representing the equivalence
of a ±3rr normal distribution spread). The Iimits of this range are called the
"0.135% quantile" ( Q111111111 ) and the "99.865% quantile" ( Q1199861 ). That is,
0.135% of the values of the population are to be found both below Q111111115 and
above Q0.9986:'i .44

44
For the nonnal form: Q0 .lJ 9865 = -Qo.oous = Zo.99K65s

142
 CHAPTER IV - Section B
Description of Conditions

0.00135 = J~"°''" f(x)dx and

0.99865 = J~ f (x) dx.

Q0.99865

The calculation for PP then is:

p = specification range specification range
" Est 99.73%Range Q11 .99 8(,, - Qowrn
where the non-normal form is used to calculate the quantiles.

The capability index C,, is calculated as above replacing s with (%J.

Because this approach uses the total variation to calculate the proportion
nonconfonning, there is no analogue of a non-normal C1)1, available,

An alternate approach to calculating Ppk using quantiles is given in some

documents by:
. USL-X - -
X -LSL J
Ppk :::::111111
( QO.OO!ll>.~ --- X
,
X -- Q0.001.~.~
This approach does not tie the Ppk index to the proportion
nonconforming. That is, different non-normal forms will have the same
index for different proportion nonconforming. To properly interpret and
· compare these indices, the non-normal form as well as the index value
should be considered.

143
CHAPTER IV - Seclion B
Description of Conditions

Multivariate Distributions
When 1nultiple characteristics are interrelated, the process distribution
should be modeled using a multivariate form. The process performance
index Ppk can be evaluated by first determining the proportion
nonconforming, i.e., the area of the n1ultivariate distribution outside the
specifications.
For many geometrically dimensioned (GD&T) characteristics. the
bivariate normal fonn is useful in describing the process.
A pair of random variables X and Y have a bl variate normal distribution
if and only if their joint probability density is given by

f(x, y) =
I
_) -
( ·l
I
. - 0(1
'
p" i

21rrr,ay R
where z = ( x -- .µ, )' - 2
p ( x -;,)( y - µY ) + ( y :µ, ·J:
a,, X(J')' l \'
(]""
p = COY ( X, }' ) = --·-
O'xa,,

for -=< -x<=·' -=< .,\ <=·' vvhere

1
-
a _r >0·' a y >0

To calculate the multivariate equivalent to the Ppk index, the multivariate

forrn ( e"t;., .l (x, y)) is used to deterrnine the proportion nonconforrning,
i.e., the volume of the multivariate distribution outside the specification
(tolerance) zone. In the bivariate case this would be:

ff
ro/1•rann 7011C
f(x, y)dxdy and

Tolerance Zone
~

p,
/
Bivariate Distribution

This value is converted to a z value using the inverse standard normal

distribution. That is, the z value such that:

144
 CHAPTER IV - Section B
Description of Conditions

Then p
pk
'~ ~
3
An estimate PP can be found using:

specijkation area
Est 99.73°/o area
where the multivariate form is used to calculate the estimated 99.73%
area.
Because this approach uses the total variation to calculate the proportion
nonconfonning, there is no analogue of a multivariate c·pk available.'1-5

45
See also Bothe (2001) and Wheeler (1995).

145
CHAPTER JV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Mensurcs

This page intentionally left blank

146
 CHAPTER IV -- Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

CHAPTER IV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures
·rhe key to effective use of any process measure continues to be the level
of understanding of what the measure truly represents. Those in the
statistical co1nmunity who generally oppose how CP, indices are being
used, arc quick to point out that few "real world" processes completely
satisfy all of the conditions, assumptions, and parameters within which
Cl', has been developed (see Gunter, B. ( 1989) and Herman, J. T. ( 1989)).
It is the position of this manual that, even when all conditions are met, it
is difilcult to assess or truly understand a process on the basis of a single
index or ratio number, for reasons discussed below.
No single index or ratio should be used to describe a process. lt is
strongly recommended that all four indices (Cf', C,,, and P,., P,,,) be
calculated on the same data set. The comparison of the indices among
the1nselves can provide insight to potential process issues and aid in
n1easuring and prioritizing improvement over time. For cxan1plc, low Cr,
C'pk values may indicate within-subgroup variability issues, whereas low
P11 , P,)k may imply overall variability issues.
Graphical analyses should be used in conjunction with the process
measures. Examples of such analyses include control charts, plots of
process distributions, and loss function graphs.
Additionally, it is helpful to graph the inherent process variation,
60"c = 6% versus total process variation, 6crl' = 6s, to compare the
2
process "capability" and "perfonnance" and to track in1provement.
Cfcnerally, the size of this gap ls an indication of the effect that special
causes have on the process. These types of graphical analyses can be
done for better process understanding even if process indices are not
used.
Process measures should be used with the objective of aligning the
"Voice of the Process" to the "Voice of the Customer". 46
All capability and performance assessments should be confined to single
process characteristics. It is never appropriate to con1binc or average the
47
capability or performance results for several processes into one index.

46
See Figure I. 1.
47
Methods for addressing multivariate processes are addressed in Chapter IV, Section B.

147
CHAP1'ER IV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

LSL USL
Par1s at location A are as "GOOD"
as parts at locations B & C

(A)

A B C
BAD GOOD BAD
"GOAL POST" MENTALITY

Target Value= Design Intent

=Customer Requirement
LSL / USL
Parts at location A: No loss
LOSS FUNCTION Parts at location B: Some loss
CURVE Parts at location C: More loss
(B)
AMOUNT OF LOSS AT G

A B C
LOSS FUNCTION MENTALITY
(Loss to Customer and/or Society)

Figure IV.5: "Goal Post" vs. Loss Function

The Loss Function Concept

The driving force behind the use of capability indices (and other process
measures) has been the desire to produce all parts within customer
specifications. The underlying concept motivating this desire is that all
parts within specification, regardless of where they are located within the
specification range, are equally "good" (acceptable), and all parts beyond
specifications, regardless of how far beyond specifications they may be,
are equally "bad" (unacceptable). Quality professionals sometimes refer
to this concept as "Goal Post" mentality (see Figure IV.5(A)).

148
 CHAPTER IV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

Although this mental model (good/bad) has been extensively used in the
past, it is suggested that a more useful model (i.e., one that is a lot closer
to the behavior of the real world), is illustrated in Figure JV.5(B). In
general, this model is a quadratic form and uses the principle that an
increasing loss is incurred by the customer or society the further a
particular characteristic gets fron1 the specification target. Implicit in
this concept, referred to as the loss function, is the presu1nption that the
design intent (specification target) is aligned with the customer's
requiren1cnt.

'The first step in nianaging variation is to understand how much variation

is acceptable; i.e., how much deviation fron1 a target or nominal value is
allowable. Traditionally the value judgment of "acceptable" and
"allowable" is based on the design engineer's understanding of the
functional requirements and the physics of the design and usage
environment (engineering subject matter knowledge), tempered by the
econo1nic constraints of the production process. 'fhe results of this part
of the design process are reflected in the engineering specifications
(tolerances).
Target
LSL (Design Intent) USL

A B C D E F
Equally Equally
Good Bad
But what do the specifications mean? Ideally, all characteristics of a
design should be equal to the design intent - the target value that would
yield perfect results. But variation exists. So what is the difference to the
customer between two different parts, one with a characteristic on target
and one having the same characteristic off target but within
specification?
A common approach can be described using the "Goal Post" analogy. In
many sports (e.g., football, soccer, hockey, basketball) a field goal is
awarded if the ball passes through the goal posts (or hoop in basketball).
It doesn't make a difference if the ball or puck enters dead center or just
slips in. The score awarded is the same.
In manufacturing processes this means that everything within the
specification limits is considered equally good, and everything outside is
equally bad.

149
CHAPTER JV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

Process Center
LSL t USL
Target
Percent Nonconforming

/
Equally Equally
Good Bad
This approach may be valid for discrete characteristics (e.g., the part has
a clearance hole or not), but when dealing with characteristics with a
continuous response, this approach does not reflect how the custon1er
reacts to different levels of the output.
Without considering the specifications, it is possible to determine the
customer's sensitivity to deviations from the target (design intent). See
Goble, et al ( 1981 ). As a characteristic deviates farther from the target,
more customers will be able to "sense" that it is different than the design
intent - primarily because it takes rnorc "effort" to use. In many cases a
loss (in time, cost, efficiency, etc.) can he associated with each deviation
increment. This loss can apply to the individual customer, but it also may
extend to the organization, or even to society.
A typical sensitivity curve (loss function) has a quadratic form.

Sensitivity Curve
(Loss Function)
/ i Increasing sensitivity or
loss due to deviation
from Target

Target
There are two ways to analyze a loss function. It can be compared either
to the design intent or functional specifications.
Target
LSL (Design Intent)

B C D E F
A
Increasing Loss
Figure IV.6: Comparison of Loss Function and Specifications

150
 CHAPTER 1\1 - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

From the customer's perspective, Figure IV.4 shows that there is

functionally little difference between a characteristic that is a "nudge" on
one side of the specification limit or the other.

A comparison of the loss function to the specifications provides a way to

classify characteristics. Figure TV.5 shows that the loss function for
Characteristic A is relatively flat within the specification limits. This
means that the custo1ner will be insensitive to variation within
specification for Characteristic A. Since all characteristics are expected
to be within specification, this characteristic satisfies the operational
definition for robust. 4 s

A characteristic is called Robust if the customer is insensitive to the

characteristic's expected variation.

Sensitivity Curves
(Loss Functions)

Target Target
Characteristic A Characteristic B
Standard Key
"Robust"

Figure IV.7: Comparison of Loss Functions

Alternative definition: A design is robust if it is tolerant (insensitive) to variation that is expected

from the manufacturing, processes, mater~als and environment.

151
CHAPTER JV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MODEL

WITH FEEDBACK

VOICE
OF THE
PROCESS

STATISTICAL
METHODS

PRODUCT~
PEOPLE~
EQUIPMENT~ THE WAY
MATERIAL~ WE WORK/
OR CUSTOMERS
METHODS~ BLENDING OF
MEASUREMENT~
SERVICES
RESOURCES
ENVIRONMENT~'--------__,

•
INPUTS •
PROCESS/SYSTEM •
OUTPUTS
IDENTIFYING
CHANGING NEEDS
AND EXPECTATIONS

VOICE
OF THE
CUSTOMER

Figure IV.8: A Process Control System

152
 CHAPTER IV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measure~

Alignment of Process to
Customer Requirements
In Chapter I, Section B (sec Figure IV.8), a process control system is
described as a feedback system. An output characteristic of such a
process can also be expressed graphically in terms of a probability
distribution. This distribution might be referred to as the process
distribution (see Figure IV.9(a)).

Loss (unweighted)

;I to customers
/generated by the
Sensitivity Curve 7 process
(Loss Function)

Target
Process Center
The sensitivity curve also provides direction in the control of the
production process. The comparison of the process to the loss function
and the specification together shows that the total loss to the customer
increases as the process center (average) deviates fron1 the target.
To assess the impact of the process distribution to the customer, a loss
function (see Figure IV.9(b)) can be established for the process
characteristic. Superimposing the process distribution on the customer
requirement loss function curve (sec Figure IV.9(c)) shows:
• How well the process center is aligned with the customer target
requirement.
• The loss to the customer being generated by this process.
Based upon these observations the following can be concluded:
• In order to mini1nize customer losses, the process (process center)
should be aligned with the customer requirement (specification
target).
• It is beneficial to the custon1er if variation around the target value is
continually reduced (see Figure IV.9(e)).

This analysis is sometimes called aligning the "Voice of the Process"

with the "Voice of the Customer" (see Scherkenbach, W.W. (1991) for
more details).

In the example in Figure IV.9(d), the parts beyond specification account

for only 45% of the total loss to the customer. The remaining loss is
coming from parts within specification but not at the target.

153
CHAPTER IV - Section C
Suggested Use or Process Measures

LSL PROCESS USL

I CENT[R-...._, PROCESS
TARGET ir-OISTRIBUTION
(CUSTOMER ROMT) ~

(a) Percentage of parts beyond specification limits

("GOAL POST" mentality)

SIZE rt- PROCESS VARIATION ~

THE PROCESS DISTRIBUTION

LSL USL
TARGET
{CUSTOMER ROMT) LOSS

(b)

CUSTOMER LOSS FUNCTION DISTRIBUTION

PROCESS
LSL CENTER USL
LOSS FUNCTION
CURVE ""' FFnl= Loss to customer being generated
EHB by this process (unweighted)

(c)

PROCESS DISTRIBUTION MISALIGNED WITH CUSTOMER TARGET

(d)

ESTIMATED TRANSLATED LOSS (PROCESS WEIGHTED)

LSL USL
fHE =Loss to customer being generated
1±±±:1 by this process (unweighted)
(•)

PROCESS ALIGNED WITH TARGET AND WITH LESS VARIATION

Figure IV.9: Process Alignment to Requirements

154
 CHAPTER TV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process Measures

l'his was determined by estimating the total loss: combining the loss
generated by the actual distribution of the parts (nonconforming parts)
and the loss due to the customer's sensitivity to variation within the
specifications. This strongly suggests that the "Goal Post" model, or
computing percentage of "bad" parts (parts beyond specifications), in
and of itself does not provide a proper appreciation for understanding the
effect the process is actually having on the customer.

!SS
CHAPTER IV - Section C
Suggested Use of Process ~..icasurcs

This page intentionally leti blank

156
 APPENDIX A
So1nc C01nrr1enls on Subgrouping

APPENDIX A
Some Comments on Sampling
Effects of Subgrouping
Control charts are used to answer questions about a process. In order to
have a control chart be useful, it is important that the charts answer the
right questions, An X chart asks the question, "Is the variation present
between subgroup averages more than is expected based on the variation
within subgroups?". Therefore, understanding sources of variation within
and between subgroups is of paramount importance in understanding the
control chart and the process variation. Most variables control charts
compare within-subgroup variation to between-subgroup variation, so it
is in1portant in interpreting the control charts to form subgroups with an
understanding of the possible sources of variation affecting the process
results.

Autocorrelated Data
There are generally 3 features to any sampling that is perf01med when
doing SPC:
I. Size: How many parts are selected in the sampie 0
2. Frequency: How often do we take a sample''
3. Type: Will the sample consist of consecutively selected pieces,
rando1nly sclected 49 pieces, or so111c other structured plan?
Of the 3 features mentioned above, most people are experienced with
and 2, but 3 is seldom considered. In fact, sample type is not even
covered in most control plan templates, The type of sample can have a
large impact on the results of SPC charting and should be understood.
Some factors that influence the impact of the sample type have to do
with the process itself - they are dependent on the nature of the
manufacturing process. One particular phenomenon com1non with many
modern day, high speed, automated processes is known as
autocorrelation.
The concept of correlation may be familiar to many people. There are
many examples of con·elation which are part of experience in everyday
life (e.g .. height/weight) where two features are compared in order to
determine if there appears to be a significant relationship between them.
As the value of one feature rises, the value of the other feature may rise
with it (indicating a positive correlation), or it may fall with it (indicating

It is important to understand the real meaning of "random". In practice, many people think that by
blindly selecting pieces that what they are doing is "random" selection. In reality, this may be
haphazard sampling or convenience sampling. Selection of a random sample requires specific
techniques to ensure that the sample is random. Using haphazard or convenience sampling when
random sampling is required can lead to erroneous and biased conclusions.

157
APPENDIX A
Some Comments on Subgrouping

a negative correlation), or it may act independently of it (zero

correlation). The mathematical formula for correlation leads to a value
between -1 (negative correlation), through zero (no correlation), to +I
(positive correlation). Jn order to achieve these results, several samples
are taken frorn the population and the two features of interest are
compared within each other. In the production world, different
characteristics or the san1e product/process n1ay he compared.
In autocotTelation, instead of comparing two features within a part, one
feature is compared to that same feature on a part produced before it. It
may be compared to the part produced immediately prior lo it (called a
/afi of 1), or two parts prior (a lag of 2), etc.

High-speed, automated processes arc often found to exhibit

autocorrelation on some characteristics. 'fhis is often because there is an
underlying predictable special cause variation which is large when
compared to the common cause variation. l'hat is, the important process
input variables have not had time to vary much in the period of time the
sample was taken when compared to the between sample variation. This
may be illustrated with examples.

Temperature example:
If one were asked to do an X and R control chart on lhc temperature of
a roon1 (or outside patio), lt does not make sense to have a sampling plan
that calls for taking 5 consecutive temperature readings - each of the 5
values would be essentially the same as each other. However, an hour
later when the next sample is taken, the temperature would likely be
different than il was an hour before, yet those 5 readings would again be
the san1e as each other. And so on.
When such a chart is completed, there would likely be some apparent
random variation in the X chart, but the Range chart would be primarily
a stream of zeroes. The average range would then be approximately
zero. R is used to calculate the control limits on the average, in the
formula X ±A, xR , so the control limits would be extremely tight on
the grand average of the data, and most points would show as being out
of control. This is an extreme example, but it serves to point out what
happens when autocorrelation is present and is ignored.

Stamping example:
Data from a coil-fed, progressive die process is typically autocorrelated.
If this data were randomized (i.e., coil-fed steel were to be cut into
blanks, randomized and then measured), the data would then not be
autocorrelated. Yet the final shipped outcome (the total process
distribution as indicated by a histogram) would be identical. The
underlying cause for the autocorrelation has been broken. Is this
practical or feasible to do forever" No. not in this case -· but this
example does serve to illustrate the possible nature of autocorrelation in
a process.

158
 APPENDIX A
Some Co1nments on Suhgiouping

Process with Autocorrelation

--,
',,_
"," '"\

,-~.-1
' -'
"-/'
-1 "

'""""

'"""''
--------·------------

Process Histogram Process Histogram

···----·- - ----- '

2% 30~ 288 2% 304

i
_ _I

Autocorrelation can lead to n1isleading conclusions if C'111: is calculated

while ignoring its effect on the process variation. Since (~,_,k is based on
R (a within-subgroup estimate of the standard deviation), it is evident in
the above cxan1ple that the (~1 ,1c will he cxtren1ely high, yet it is obvious
that there is more variation in the process which has not been captured by
C'p1c·

Identifying Autocorrelation
To discover if a process is autocorrelated, firstly, consider the process
inputs in terms of the 6M's_ 50 If a process is highly dependent on the
operator, it is not likely that the process would be autoco1Telated_ On the
other hand, if the process is highly dependent on raw material and that
raw material is a continuous variable (such as a coil of steel used to feed
a metal stamping process), autocorrelation within each coil is highly
likely_ Similarly, for a process which is highly dependent on specific
machine related characteristics (such as a stamping press and die
combination as affected by lubrication, die temperature, tool condition,
etc_)_ When a process is both material and machine dependent,
autocorrelation may be significant_

so Man, Material, Method, Machine, Mother Nature (Environment), Measurement System_

159
APPENDJXA
Some Conunents on Subgrouping

Secondly, there are statistical analyses 11 that can be used to determine the
actual autocorrelation coefficient and pattern. The methodology of
paired sample correlation analysis can be used Lo compare the current
sample to the prior sample, then the next sample to the current sample,
etc. When samples from a process arc stable and independent, the plotted
point will be positioned "randomly" (random from a n01mal distribution)
between the control limits. The plotted points from an autocorrelated
process will not vary far fron1 their neighboring sampling points, forming
a lazy, wandering pattern,

Ways to Address Autocorrelation

Often, nothing can be done to change an autocon·elated process.
Different sampling methods may be called for.
I and MR:
If the within-subgroup variation is less than or equal to the
discrimination of the measuren1ent system which is appropriate for the
process, an I and MR chart may be a suitable method to control the
process variation. However, very strong autocorrelation may still display
itself in a non-random pattern.
Structured Samples:
The selection of the sampling quantity and frequency should rcllect the
do1ninant sources of variation. For example, if the process is material
dominant, then the sampling should occur whenever the material changes
(e.g., with the change of coils).

Autoregressive Charts:
In cases where the assumption that the sample data are independent is
violated, an autoregressive model would be appropriate. See Chapter !II.
Structured Charting:
If the source (special cause) of the autocorrelation is predictable, it is
possible to control the process by segregating the within-subgroup
variation from the between-subgroup variation on separate charts. 'I'he
Between/Within chart utilizes an I and MR chart approach as well as the
typical Range chart:
• The Individuals chart plots the subgroup averages treated as
individuals against the control limits based on the Mo1'ing Ranges.
• The MR chart plots the between-subgroup variation using the moving
ranges based on the subgroup averages.
• The Range (or Standard Deviation) chart plots the within-subgroup
variation.

51
The Durbin-Watson test stat1st1c is one method to determine the degree of autocorrelation and is
included in many statistical software packages. See Biometrika, 38, pp. 159-178, i 951.

160
 APPENDIX A
Some Comrnents on Subgrouping

These would be analyzed using the standard control charting methods to

assure that both the common cause (within-subgroup) variation and the
cause of the autocorrelation (between-subgroup) remain consistent (see
Wheeler (1995)).

Summary
What is important here is considering the concept of autocorrelation and
the ability to recognize it in a process. then understanding its possible
impact on statistical results.
This discussion of autocorrelation is intended only to raise awareness
that such a phenomenon exists. how to recognize it. and that its effects, if
not recognized or understood, can be quite harn1ful to otherwise good
SPC practices. If the reader should suspect autocorrelation in a process,
then a statistician should be consulted.
It is i1nportant to understand the real meaning of "random". In practice,
many people think that by blindly selecting pieces here and there that
what they are doing is "random" selection. In reality, this may be
haphazard sampling or convenience sampling (sec Glossary). Selection
of a random sample requires specific techniques (see a statistical
reference book). Using haphazard or convenience sampling when
random sarr1pling is required can lead to biased and therefore erroneous
conclusions.

161
APPENDIX A
So1nc Comments on Subgrouping

Multiple Stream Process

Example
(~onsider the following exan1ple: A production process consists of four
parallel operations. It is suggested that variation in process output should
be studied with control charts, so a decision needs to be made on how to
collect the data for the charts. There is a variety of possible sampling
schemes that could be considered. Parts could be taken from each stream
to form a subgroup, or parts from only one stream could be included in
the same subgroup, or subgroups could be formed by taking parts from
the combined stream of output without regard to their source. The
numerical example below provides an example of possible results
obtained using these three n1ethods.

Methods to collect data from the output of a multiple stream (spindle) production
process

Collect data from each stream

separately. A subgroup consists
of measurements from only one
stream.

Incoming Parts

Method 1: Method 3:
A subgroup consists of one A subgroup consists of
or more measurements from measurements from the
each stream: this method of combined outputs of all streams
subgrouping is stratified.

Every hour a 16 part sample is collected by taking the parts from four
consecutive cycles from each stream<

162
 APPENDIX A
Some Comn1cnts on Suhgrouping

The following is an example of the data.

CYCLE OF THE MACHINE

SAMPLE# A B ' c D
Stream SI 17 18 I 18 20
Stream S2 12 15 I' 12 12
Stream S3 9 10 I 9 12
Stream S4 10 11 I 12 12 I

There are three sources of variation captured in the data. Cycle-to-Cycle

varialion is captured by different columns in the array, stream-to-stream
variation is captured by the rows of the array, and hour-to-hour variation
is captured by different samples of 16 parts.

One subgrouping scheme would be to plot the average and range of each
column of each array of data. l.Jsing this suhgrouplng scheme, stream-to-
stream variation would be contained within each subgroup. Hour-to-hour
variation and cycle-to-cycle variation would contribute to differences
between subgroups. Another possible subgrouping scheme would be to
plot the average and range of each row of each array of data. With this
subgrouping scheme, cycle-to-cycle variation would be contained within
each subgroup and hour-to-hour and strcam-to-streatn variation would
contribute to differences between subgroups.

Subgrouping by Column Subgrouping by Row

/ c"' 7;
~
#1 D x Ft #2 A D x R #'.l A B c D x R
S1 I' 1() 'l 12 Fl.O ~s1_. __ 9___ ... _~ __12. __ ,, __tL 11 0 81 Hi 1? 11 1() 10.8
S2 '12 1:, 12 12 12.8 (22 11 '13 10 11 ' 11_3 S2 11 12 12 1'1 11.5
53 17 10 18 20 18.3 SJ 15 17 17 17 16 5 $3 16 16 20 16 17.0 4
S4 10 11 12 12 11.3 $4 12 1G 12 11 12 !i 4 S4 10 11 12 11 11.0
x 17.0 1'.l.S 12.8 14.0 x 11.8 14 :J 12 ll 1/.5 x 11.8 12.8 Ll.8 "2.0
R 8 8 9 8 R 6 5 7 R 6 5 9 6

#4 A B c D x R #5 A B c D x R #6 A B c D x R
$1 6 6 8 6.0 2 31 11 11 8 10 10 0 S1 8 10 7 6 7.fl 4
S2 8 8 9 8.3 S2 13 15 13 15 14.0 S2 9 10 9 9 9.3
S3 14 15 15 13 14.3 s:i 17 18 1!J 1(-i 1 /.5 s:i 15 15 14 15 14.H
S4 7 7 7 6.8 S4 11 12 13 11 11.8 2 S4 6 5 6 6.0 2

Vv:JV !) x 1J 0 14 0 13_() x 9.5

Data from 20 consecutive hours are used to construct control charts with
each subgrouping method.

163
APPENDIX A
Some Comrnents on Suhgrouping

Method 1: Subgrouping by column (Cycle)

This subgrouping scheme yields 80 subgroups of size n = 4. The grand
average is 11.76 units. The average range is 7.85. The control limits for
the X chart arc 17.48 and 6.()4 units, and the upper control limit for the
range chart is 17 .91 units.
A review of the Range chart indicates that the within-subgroup variation
appears to be stable using this method.

X-Bar Chart for Data Subgrouped by Column (Cycle)

20
16

4
0

Range Chart for Data Subgrouped by Column (Cycle)

20
16 L

164
 APPENDIX A
So1ne Co1nrncnts on Subgrouping

Method 2: Subgrouping by Row

The second subgrouping scheme yields 80 subgroups of size n = 4. The

average range is 2.84 units. 'I'he control lin1its for the X chart are 13.83
and 9. 70 units, and the upper control limit for the range chart is 6.46
units. The control charts for this subgrouping scheme are shown below.

X-Bar Chart for Data Subgrouped by Row (Spindle)

20
16
UCL-
= x
12 x
LCL-x
B
4
0

Range Chart for Data Subgrouped by Row (Spindle)

20 ·····.········································

16
12
8
---------------------------------ft;:---:--:·-----------.;---,.-------~-~-----------------------~-~-----------. uc LR
4 =~11. .11 ... .11 ~AAd\:dl/I ....-..n,J\;/\O """. . · · -
o ~ "Y"""P • ~~¥ £\/Yw:='? a v'7';;1 R

The control charts for the different subgrouping schemes are very
different even though they are derived from the same data. The X chart
for data subgrouped by row shows a pattern: All of the points
corresponding to spindle 3 are noticeably higher than those from the
other streams. The first X chart does not reveal the stream-to-stream
differences because readings from each stream are averaged to obtain
each X value.
By grouping the data differently, the charts address different questions.
For the first set of charts, streain-to-stream variation is used as a basis of
con1parison. The R chart checks to see that stream-to-stream variation is
stable over time and the X chart compares cycle-to-cycle and hour-to-
hour with strcan1-to-stream variation.

165
APPENDJX A
Sorne Con1111cnts on Subgrouping

The second set of charts use cycle to cycle variation as a basis for
comparison. The R chart checks to see that the cycle-to-cycle variation is
stable over time and the X chart cornpares strea1n-to-stream variation
and hour-lo-hour variation with the base level of variation established by
the ranges; i.e., cycle-to-cycle variation. The second set of charts identify
that a special cause is affecting the process; i.e., the third stream is
different from the other streams. Since the stream to stream differences
are so Jarge, the control limits in the first set of charts are much wider
than the second set.

With the second subgrouping method, the data could be used to create
four separate sets of control charts from the data, one for each stream.

X-Bar Charts
Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4

16. i

7\...........-;::.;····i\"i::J\::a.:·r;.··:~·-;.;.::,,._:
12 ·· ,..............
a .. (?v.*;?!'5[_,g :.·::V·:~:-·!'.:·-~??
4. i

R Charts
Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4
8 ···············································································································································································································

This comparison of the charts shows that the average of the third stream is
higher than the others and the individual processes arc out of control. The
base level of variation used for study of the results from each stream is cycle-
to-cycle variation as reflected in the range. For each stream the effects of
hour-to-hour variation are shown on the X charts. By plotting the charts
using the same scale, the level and variation for each stream can be
compared.

Method 3:
The third method of sampling would be to sample the parts from the
combined output from all four streams. This method gives some insight
into the variation that is sent to the next process but the parts can no
longer be differentiated by production stream. Provided the parts in the

166
 APPENDIX A
So1m.:: Cununenis on Subgrouping

combined strea1n are n1ixed. the ranges retlect a mixture of stream-to-

stream and cycle-to-cycle variation. The X values contain, in addition,
hour-to-hour variation. If the hour to hour contribution to variation is
large enough, that contribution will be seen as out-of-control points on
the X chart.

Combined Output X-Bar Chart

18
-------------------------------------------- - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
:: l\;t=y's;::;:?' :-:=~-~"'" ~CL,
6 .• -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------·-·------------------------------
LCL x
3
0 .

Combined Output R Chart

16----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. 'UCL . R
12

0 ············--· ·········-·········----------·····--············----·-----···--·······

The R chart checks to see if strean1-to-strearn and cycle-to-cycle

variation is consistent over time. The X chart answers the question, "Is
the variation in X values what would be expected if cycle-to-cycle and
stream-to-stream variation were the only klnds of variation present in the
process, or, is there additional change hour to hour?"
As a general rule, the variation that is represented within subgroups
should be the kind of variation that is believed to he the least significant
or least interesting as a subject for current study, In all cases, a method of
subgrouping should be used that will allow questions about the effects of
potential sources of variation to be answered.

167
APPENDIX A
Sorne Cornrncnts on Subgrouping

Effects of Sample Size on

Indices
A con11non scenario when evaJuating a process using indices is that the
results of one sample may seemingly contradict the results of a second
sample. This is especially prevalent with new processes where the initial
sample taken to qualify the process for production has index values that
meet or exceed the customer requirements but a subsequent sample taken
during normal production has indices that fall short of the requirements.
'fhe reasons for this are varied:

• The process has changed from the initial sampling to the full
production san1pling - e.g., the initial sampling n1ay have been using
different material. setups, procedures, etc.
• The initial sampling did not include all the possible sources of
variation which are affecting the production process. This is a real
possibility if the initial sample size is small.
• The actual process index is close to the target index and sampling
variation is causing the difference in conclusions.
The first two reasons relate to the understanding of the sources of
variation acting on the process and are discussed in Chapter !.
The third reason deals with the sa1npling variation inherent 1n any
sampling scheme (see also Chapter I, Section G). Unless the sample
includes all the output of the process, there will be sampling variation"
when calculating a statistic (in this case an index) of the process
distribution.

Sampling Actual Ppk

Variation 'f

Confidence Bounds
Using the sampling distribution (the distribution of the statistic (index)),
it is possible to calculate confidence bounds for the index. These values

52
Note: Although the actual sampling distribution of the indices will generally be non-normal, this
discussion will use a symmetric distribution as an example.

168
 APPENDTX A
So1ne Co1nmenls on Suhgrouping

can then be used to make a decision about the process (e.g .• is it

acceptable or not).
Using a common alpha risk level of .05 as an example, the 95%
confidence bounds \vill identify the range of possible values that will
contain the actual (and unknown) value 95% of the time. That is, if the
sampling was identically repeated I00 times, the same decision
(acceptable or unacceptable) on the process would be made 95 times.

t I Upper Confidence Bound

---------
>;,

\ Lower Confidence Bound

Sample Size
The width of the sampling distribution is a function of the sample size.
The larger the sample size the "tighter" the sampling distribution. It is
this attribute of the sampling distribution that can lead to seemingly
contradictory conclusions.
For example, when evaluating new processes the initial sample is usually
small due to the availability of raw materials/parts. Once the process is in
production, this constraint is not present.

Initial Extended
Study Study

t --'-+""""'---==:;~=--Target Ppk
-Actual Ppk

Sample Size

169
APPENDIX A
So1nc Corruncnls on Subgrouping

When the actual index is close to the target index then the differences in
sampling variation can lead to seemingly contradictory concluslons even
if there are no changes in the process and both samples encompass the
same sources of variation.

Initial Extended
Study Study

t
- Actual Ppk
,J~--=::::::ia:;l=-- Target Ppk

Sample Size

In the case where the actual index (unknown) is exactly equal to the
target index then, regardless of the sample size, the probability of calling
the process acceptable is only 50%. In other words, the calculated index
will be greater or equal to the target index only half the time.

Initial Extended
Study Study

t t t
Actual Ppk
- -and
Target Ppk

Sample Size
The sample size used in a process study and how close the actual index
is to the target index has a significant impact on the validity of any
predictive decision made about the process.

170
 APPENDIX B
Some Con1rnents on Special Causes

APPENDIX B
Some Comments on Special Causes
Over-Adjustment

Over-adjustment is the practice of treating each deviation from the

target as if it were the result of the action of a special cause of variation
in the process.
If a stable process is adjusted on the basis of each measurement made,
then the adjust1nent becomes an additional source of variation. 'fhe
following examples demonstrate this concept. The first graph shows the
variation in results with no adjustment. The second graph shows the
variation in results when an adjustment is made to the process to
compensate for each deviation from the target. The third graph shows
variation in results when adjustn1cnts are rnade to compensate only when
the last result was more than one unit from the target. This third case is
an example of compensation to stay within a set of specifications. Each
method of adjustment increases the variation in the output, since the
variation without adjustment is stable (see Deming ( 1989), Chapter 11 ).

171
APPENDJXB
Some Co1nments on Special Causes

Results with no adjustment

:i:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~
24
-----------------------------------
22
20
18
16

14 -----------------------------------
1 Normal
Variation

12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Results with adjustment to compensate for last deviation from target

30 -----------------------------------
28 -----------------------------------
26
24
22
Note Increase
20
in variation
18
16
14

12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

*Results with adjustment to compensate for last deviation from target

if deviation was greater than 1

30 -----------------------------------
28 -----------------------------------
26 ---------------------------------
24
22
Note Increase
20 in variation
18
16 - - - - - - - - - - -
14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

12 -----------------------------------

NOTE: These charts assume the measurement system has been

assessed and is appropriate.

172
 APPENDIXB
Some Corn1ncnts on Special Cause.'1

Time Dependent Processes

Case 3 processes (sec Chapter I, Section E) are usually difficult to fit into
the classical control chart model, Few processes of these types remain
strictly stable over time. Because the within-subgroup variation is usually
sn1all, 111inor fluctuations in process location or dispersion 111ay cause a
process to be out of statistical control, when, in frtct, the condition has a
minimal practical effect on product quality and the customer,
For example, consider a process that has a fairly constant dispersion, but
has s1nall, rando1n location changes. When the control litnits were
established based on the first 25 samples, numerous points out of control
were revealed.

Xbar Chart of Process

30

25

c
•
..
~
~
20
\:!(L=20.92
X=19.6s
,,,-..,-,.,--· LCL:=18.37
~

15

5 11 1.5 ~J 25 31 35 41 45 50
Saft1Jle
IL,____

Yet, because the process capability is small when compared to the

specifications and the loss function is flat, a histogram of the data
suggests that there is a minimal risk of impacting the customer.

LSL USL

Target

173
APPENDIX B
Some Comments on Special Causes

----- ··------

L5L"" 13
Histogram of Process USL = 27
-
35

30

25

~ 20
~
! ~ 15

10

OJ_-~J_~__l\TI'II
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

The process is being run on one shift per day. When the data are
evaluated on that basis, the process exhibited short-term periods of
statistical control.

Xbar Chart of Combined Process by Stage

Time Period O 1 2. 3 4
30 -,-------,-· --------,-----
1 I I
I I I
I I I
25 I I I
I I I I

!
~
"'
20 ~--______J~~---
. . . ____ __]......_ .. __...,
c__ _:.:-:: __ J
I
I
- ----~·h··-
µ_:_-. __: __
I I I
15 I I I
I I I

· L10: =
1 ·
5 · . 11 i 15 i
21 25 l
31 35 41 45 50
.. ...,1e

This implies that the process could be monitored using a short run chart
(see Chapter III). Other time dependent processes can be monitored by
the Individuals and Moving Range Chart, the EWMA Chart, the ARIMA
Chart and others.
The charts reveal sensitivity to some special cause. The need for further
investigation or process improve1nent should be considered in the
context of business priorities.
The question is whether process parameters are reliable when estimated
under such conditions. The answer is no. Deming (1986), Wheeler and
Chambers (1992) and Bothe (2002) discuS> the risks involved in making
capability evaluations when the process lacks statistical control. The
consequences of tnaking an erroneous decision based on data from an

174
 APPENDIXB
Some Co1nments on Special Cause:;

unstable process can be severe. In general, a stable process is a

prerequisite for correctly estimating process capability.
However, in certain situations, such as the time dependent process in the
example, the classical indices will provide a conservation estimate of the
process performance.

Under certain circumstances, the customer 1nay allow a producer to run a

process even though it is a Case 3 process. 'fhese circumstances may
include:
• The custorner is insensitive to variation within specifications (see
discussion on the loss function in Chapter IV).
• The economics involved in acting upon the special cause exceed the
benefit to any and all customers. Economically allowable special
causes 1nay include tool wear, tool regrind, cyclical (seasonal)
variation, etc.
• The special cause has been identified and bas been documented as
consistent and predictable.
In these situations, the custorner may require the following:
• l'he process is mature.
• The special cause to be allowed has been shown to act in a consistent
manner over a known period of tlme.
• A process control plan is in effect which will assure conformance to
specification of all process output and protection from other special
causes or inconsistency ln the allowed spcclal cause.

Repeating Patterns
1~here are times when repetitive patterns arc present in control charts due
to known assignable causes -- causes that cannot economically be
eliminated.
i'i
Consider an operation where an outer diameter of a shaft is being
machined. As the machining tool wears, the outer diameter will beco1nes
larger. In this example the average chart would have an increasing trend.
This trend would continue until the tool is replaced. Over time the
average chart will exhibit a sawtooth pattern. As this example
highlights, repetitive trends will be present when a process has
significant input variables that change consistently overtime which
cannot econo1nically be reduced to randon1 causes.

Another example of a process that can produce trends is a process

involving chemicals. As parts are processed, the concentration of the
chemicals becomes weaker thereby producing a trend. The trend
continues until the chemical concentration is brought back to tbe initial
level by process adjustment.

175
APPENDIX ll
Some Co1nn1ents nn Special Causes

Other examples include processes influenced by ambient temperature,

humidity and human fatigue. When these types of repetitive patterns
exist, the average chart will exhibit conditions associated with an out-of-
control process since there is the (economically influenced) special cause
acting on the process. If the influence of this special cause can be sho\vn
to be predictable over time and the additional variation is acceptable to
the customer, then the process controls can be modified to allow it.
One approach to this is replacing standard control limits with modified
control limits. See AT&T (1984), Grant and Leavenworth (1996),
Duncan (1986), Charbonneau Webster (1978) for more information on
modified control limits.

Where modified control limits are used caution should be employed since
these charts may fail to disclose the presence or absence of statistical
control in the manufacturing process.
An alternate approach is to use the Regression Control Chart discussed in
Chapter lll.
Besides influencing trends, these types of special causes may also cause
a batch to batch mean shift. If this additional variation is acceptable to
the customer then the process may be controlled using Short Run Charts
discussed in Chapter Ill.

176
 APPENDIX C
Selection Procedure for the Use or the Control C:harts Described in This Manual

APPENDIX C
Selection Procedure for the Use of the Control Charts
Described in This Manual

Determine Characteristic
To Be Charted

Is The ls The
Are Interest In Interest In
The Data NO Nonconforming NO Nonconformities
Variable? Units - e.g., Percen - e.g., Discrepancies
"bad" Parts per Part?

YES

Is The
Use p Sample Size Use u
YES Chart Chart
Constant?

YES
Use npOR Use c OR
p Chart u Chart

Are They
Homogeneous Can
~n Nature Or Not Subgroup
Conducive To NO NO
Averages Be Uso
Subgroup SL!bsamp!lng Conveniently Median Chart
- E.g., Chemical
Bath, Paint Computed
Batch.
Etc,
YES

YES ls The YES Use

Subgroup Size
X-SChart
9 Or More?
Use Chart For
Individuals: X-MR NO

Is There
Ability To NO
Conveniently Compute Use
X • R Chart
s For Each
Subgroup?
Note: This chart assumes the mea-
surement system has been assessed
and is appropriate YES

Use
X· S Chart

177
APPENDIX C
Selection Procedure for the Use of lhe Control Chart~ DcscribcrJ in Thi:-; N1m111al

This page intentionally left blank

178
APPENDJX D
Relation.~hip Between Cpm and 0Lhcr Jndic~s

APPENDIX D
Relationship Between Cpm and Other Indices

'rhe C'pm index, often associated with rfaguchi's J_.oss Function, was
developed as an alternate way to account for the effect of process
centering on estimates of process capahillty or performance. 1'he C 11k and
Ppk indices focus on the process mean and not the specification target
value, while the Crm index focuses on the target value. As discussed jn
Chapter IV, all four of the standard indices (C1,, Cp;, P1,, and Pp 1) should
be evaluated for the same data set to obtain a comprehensive assessment
of process capability and performance. A large difference between Cl'
and Cf!/.: or between Pr and JY 1)1. is an indicatjon of a centering problem. In
contrast, by including the variation between the process mean and the
specification target value in the calculation, the C'rm index evaluates how
well the process meets the specification target \Vhcther il is centered or
not. See Boyles (1991) and Chan, L. J., S.W. Cheng, and F.A. Spiring
( 1988) for additional information.

'fhe difference between cpl!/ and other indices discussed in this n1anual
results from the way the standard deviation is calculated. The indices
discussed in the text use the standard deviation~ i.e., the variatlon around
process mean, X . C'11m uses an analogue based on the target, i.e .. the
variation around the target, T

C = USL-LSL where
pm 6s.
(,pm

51
The following graphs assume bilateral tolerance: That is,
(USL - T) = (T-LSL)

53
See Bothe (2001) for a discussion of the situation where Tis not the n1iddle of the specification.

179
APPENDIX D
Relationship Between Crm and Other lndices

LSL T USL
1! Cp CPL CPU Cpk Cpm

13 2 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.11

10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18
LSL T USL
1! Cp CPL CPU Cpk Cpm

14 2 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.00

10 11 12 13 fl 15 16 17 18
LSL T USL
1! Cp CPL CPU Cpk Cpm

15 2 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.11

10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18
LSL T USL

1! Cp CPL CPU Cpk Cpm

16 2 3.0 1.0 1.0 0.63

10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

LSL T USL
1! Cp CPL CPU Cpk Cpm

17 2 3.5 0.5 0.5 0.43

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18

180
 APPEND TX E
Table of Const:ints and Formulas for Control Chans

APPENDIX E
Table of Constants and Formulas for Control Charts'' '

x and R Charts x and s Charts I

Chart for (~hart for l~anges (R) Chart for Chart for IZanges (R)
Averages Averages
Control Divisors to Factors for Control Divisors to Factors for
Lin1its Estirnate Control Li1nits Li1nits Estiinate C:ontrol Li1nits
Factor
CJx
----·-·-·~---
Factor
CJx I
Subgroup A, d, o, D, AJ ('4 BJ B,
Size I
2 L880 Ll28 - 3.267 2.659 0.7979 - 3.267
3 U123 1.693 - i 2.574 L954 11.8862 - 2.568 I
2,282 1.628 0.9213 2,266
- t
4 [),729 2.059 - -
0,577 2,326 1.427 0.9400 2,()89 I,
5 2,114 -· -
·--- -----·---- --·-~---

6 0.483 2.534 - ' 2.004 1.287 0.9515 0.0311 1.970

I
7 0.419 2. 7114 0.076 1.924 1.182 0.9594 0.118 1.882
8 0.373 2.847 0.136 1.864 1.099 0.9650 0.185 1.815
9 0.337 2.970 0.184 1.816 un2 0.9693 0.239 1.761
10 0.308 3.078 0.223 i 1.777 0.975 0.9727 0.284 1.716
11 0.285 3.173 0.2.\6 1.744 0.927 0.9754 0.321 1.679
-~-------·----
----·
12 0.266 3.258 0.283 1.717 0.886 0.9776 0.354 1.646
13 0.249 3.336 0.307 1.693 0.850 0.9794 0.382 1.618
'

14 0.235 .l.407 0.328 I 1.672 0.817 0.9810 0.406 1.594

15 0.223 3.472 0.347 l.653 0.789 0.9823 0.428 l.572 !
16 - 0.212 3.532 0.363 1.637 0.763 0.9835 0.448 1.552
· · - - · ____ ___
,, ,

17 (l.203 3.588 0.378 l.622 0.739 0.9845 0.466 1.534

.. -·
0.391 I 1.608
' " ~ ------~

18 0.194 3.640 0.718 0.9854 0.482 1.518

19 0.187 3.689 0.403 1.597 0.698 0.9862 0.497 1.503
20 0.180 3.735 0.415 l.585 0.680 0.9869 11.5 l 0 1.490
21 0.173 3.778 0.425 1.575 0.663 0.9876 0.523 1.477
22 0.167 3.819 0.434 1.566 0.647 0.9882 0.534 1.466
23 0.162 3.858 0.443 l.557 0.633 0.9887 0.545 1.455
24 0.157 3.895 0.451 1.548 0.619 0.9892 0.555 1.445
25 0.153 3.931 0.459 1.541 0.606 0.9896 0.565 1.435

Centerline Control Limits

- -
x and R Charts CLx =X UCL-.x =X +A.,R
' LC!-,;= X -A,,R

CLR =R UCLR = D,R LCLR = D,R

x and s Ch<u-ts CL-x =X UCL-x =X +A,S
. LCL_1 = X -A,S
CL. =s UCL, =B,s LCL, =B,s
'

Fron1 ASTM publication STP-150, Manual on the Presentation of Dara and Control Chart Analysis, 1976;
pp 134- 136. Copyright ASTM. 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103. Reprinted, with
perrnission.

181
APPENDIXE
Table of Conslanl~ and f-iorn1u!a~ for Control Charts

APPENDIX E - Table of Constants and Formulas for Control Charts (Cont.)

r---
~
Median C'harts ** Charts for Individuals
Chart for
Medians
Chart for Ranges (R) Chart for
Tndividuals
I Chart for Ranges (R)

Control Divisors to Factors for (~ontrol Divisors to Factors for

Limits Estimate Control Limits Limits Estimate Control Li1nits
Factor Factor
er x <J'x

Subgroup
Size Xf d, o, I D4 E, d1 D:i D/1
i
2 1 .880 1.128 - 3.267 2.660 1.128 - 3.267

3 1.187 1.693 - 2.574 1.772 1.693 - 2.574 .

-
4 0.796 2.059 - 2.282 1.457 2.059 - 2.282
--
5 0.691 2.326 -
i 2.114 1.290 2.326 - 2.114
6 0.548 2.534 - 2.004 1.184 2.534 - 2 004
-
7 0.508 2.704 0.076 1.924 1.109 2.704 0.076
-· 1.924 !
8 0.433 2.847 0.136 1.864 1.054 2.847 0.136 1.864
9 0.412 2.970 0.184 1.816 1.010 2.970 0.184 1.816 i
·-
10 0.362 3.078 0.223 1.777 0.975 3.078 0.223
~·----~-----~ I 1.772-_J

Centerline Control Limits

Median Charts CL'li' = ffi - , ;fl,. = ff
UCL 0
- +~R
2 LCL-
x
= ffi)_ ~R
"

CLii =R UCLR =D4R LCL11 =D,R

Charts for Individuals CLx =X UCLx = X +E 2 R LCLx = X --E,R

CLR -R
- UCLR =D4R LCLR = D,R

For extended d2 tables see the MSA Manual 3'ct edition.

~factors derived fro1n ASTM-STP-150 Data and Efficiency Tables contained in Dixon and Massey
(1969), page 488.

182
 APPENDIXE
Table of Constants and Formulas for Con!rol Charts

APPENDIX E - Table of Constants and Formulas for Control Charts (Cont.)

Attributes Charts

Centerline Control Limits

i
'
Satnples not necessarily of constant size '

p chart for
UCL,:= p + 3 .jpF, p) LCL~ = p - 3 .j PF, p)
proportions of CLP= p l1 i l1 i

units in a category If the sample size is constant (nL_ "------

UCLP = p+3.jp~p) LCL =-_3.jp(l-p)

I' p . J;;
11 11

- - np - - np
np chart for - UCL,,P = np + 3 np(I---;) LCL,,,, = np - 3j np(I ---; )
number/rate of CL!!p - np 1
units in a category
= np + 3.j np(I - p) = np -3~ np(I - p)
c chart for number
of incidences in
CL, -- c
one or 111orc ucLc =c+3Jf LCL1 =c -3-!f
categories
Samples not necessarily or constant size
- 3.Jfi 3.fii
UCL,, =u+ J0ni LCL
,,
= - -
u Fn,
=u+3l =u-3
ni l
-------
Using average sample size --
- 3.fii
UCL =u+-- LCL -
- u
- --- 3.fii
u chart for
number of CL = u
" ./ii " ./ii

~ =u-3~
incidences per unit "
111 one or more =u+3
categories
If the sample size is constant (11)

UCL =- 3.fii - 3.fii

LCL =u---
" u+ J;; " J;;f1
= iT +3 =iT-3l
l 1
--

183
APPENDJXE
Table of Conslarlls and Formulas for Control Charts

This page intentionally left blank

184
 APPEND!XF
Capahiliiy Index Calculaiions Example

APPENDIX F
Capability Index Calculations Example
For capability.1 indices to be valid, several assun1ptions should be satisfied
(see Chapter IV, Section A and Section B). They are:
• The process from which the data come is statistically stable, that is,
the normally accepted SPC rules must not be violated.
• 'fhe individual measure1nents fron1 the process data form an
approximately nonnal distribution. 54
• A sufficient number of parts n1ust be evaluated in order to capture
the variation that is inherent in the process. It is recommended that at
least 125 individual values be collected using a subgroup size of five.
Other subgroup sizes 1nay be 1nore appropriate for a particular
application, but the total sample size should be at least ! 25.
• 1'he specifications are based on customer requirements.

The following data set is evaluated against these assumptions and, since
the assu111ptions hold, the capability indices are calculated.

54
For non-normal distributions, see Chapter IV, Section B.

185
APPENDIX F
Capability ln<lex Calculations Exa1nplc

Data Set:

Data Diameter Data Diameter Data Diameter Data Diameter Data Diameter
Point Point Point Point Point
1 22.30 26 22.37 51 22.28 76 22.65 101 22.48
2 22.54 27 22.34 52 22.55 77 22.50 102 22.38
3 22.01 28 22.75 53 22.38 78 22.41 103 22.28
4 22.62 29 22.71 54 22.65 79 22.39 104 22.72
5 22.65 30 22.51 55 22.56 80 22.48 I 05 22.96
6 22.86 31 22.23 56 22.54 81 22.50 106 22.53
7 22.68 32 22.36 57 22.25 82 22.86 107 22.52
8 22.43 33 22. 90 58 22.40 83 22.60 108 22.61
9 22.58 34 22.45 59 22.72 84 22.60 109 22.62
I0 22.73 35 22.48 60 22.90 85 22.66 11 () 22.60
11 22.88 36 22.60 61 22.31 86 22.79 111 22.54
12 22.68 37 22.72 62 22.57 87 22.61 112 22.56
13 22.46 38 22.35 63 22.38 88 22.81 113 22.36
14 22.30 39 22.51 64 22.58 89 22.66 114 22.46
15 22.61 40 22.69 65 22.30 90 22.37 115 22.71
16 22.44 41 22.61 66 22.42 91 22.65 116 22.84
17 22.66 42 22.52 67 22.21 92 22.75 117 22.52
18 22.48 43 22.52 68 22.45 93 21.92 118 22.88
19 22.37 44 22.49 69 22.24 94 22.00 119 22.68
20 22.56 45 22.31 70 22.55 95 22.45 120 22.54
21 22.59 46 22.42 71 22.25 96 22.51 121 22.76
22 22.65 47 22.64 72 22.36 97 22.58 122 22.65
23 22.78 48 22.52 73 22.25 98 22.46 123 22.51
24 22.58 49 22.40 74 22.3t1 99 22.76 124 22.77
25 22.33 50 22.63 75 22.67 100 22.56 125 22.43

186
 APPENDIX F
Capability lndcx Calculations Exc11nple

Analysis
Histogram Chart, Normality Plot and the Xbar and R Chart can be used to determine the validity of the
first t\VO assumptions.

Histogram of Diameter Data

I.SL USL

WTffiTil
overai1

21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5

Normal Probability Plot

,999
,99
.95
>- .80
·""'
.D
co .50
.D
0
~

Q_
.20
P-Value: 0.677
.05
.01
.001

22.0 22.5 23.0

Diameter

The above two graphs provide evidence that the data likely came from a normally distributed population.

187
APPENDIX F
Capability jndex Cakulatiou~ Exair1ple

Xbar/R Chart for Diameter

22.8
UCL,,,22.77
c 22.7
::z"'
Q)
22.6
Q)
Mean=22.53
(i 22.5
E
22.4
"'
[f)
223 LCL=22.29

Subgroup 0 5 10 15 20 25

UCL"'"0.8847

Fl=o0-4184

l_CL=O

Control charts provide evidence that the process is in statistical control. Consequently it is
appropriate to calculate the indices for this data set.

Diameter Statistics:

Sample size= n = 125

Subgroup Size= S
Number of Subgroups= 25

Upper Specification Limit= 23.5

Lower Specification Limit = 21.5

l'he specifications are based on customer and functional requirements.

. .
W1thm-subgroup .
standard deviation= -
cr, = R%l = 0.4184 = 0 .17 9880
c2 2.326

Total variation standard deviation =s = Ii

(x, -
n--1
x/ = 0.189037

The above information is necessary for the evaluation of the indices.

188
 APPENDlX F
Capability Index Calculations Exarnplc

C = USL - LSL = 23.5 - 21.5 = 1.R

/I 6 (%,) 6X0, 179881
5

,
C" = Mm1mum
1
..
-
[ (%J,
CPL=
X-
3
LSL
CPU= (%J
USL -

3
-i
X

. .
= M 1111mum (CPL = 22.5308 - 21.5 CP U = -
23.5
-- -22.5308)
--
3 x 0. 179880 , 3 x 0.179880

= Minimum (CPL = 1.91, CPU = 1.80)

1

= 1.80

p" = USL - LSL = 23.5 - 21.5 = 1.

76
6s 6x0. I 89037

I,pk = M' .
,_ 1n1mun1
(PPl
~ l d =X - LSL
-----~-·,
6s
!'PU= USL - X
6s

. .
= M 1n1mun1 (PPL = -
22.5308
----
- 21.5 PPU = 23.5 - 22.5308)
3 x 0.189037 , 3 x 0.189037

= Minimum (PPL = 1.82, PPU = 1.71)

= 1.71

189
APPENDlX F
Capabiiity index Calculations Example

Conclusion:
The following observations are made:
• C' 11 k is approximately equal to C'/!, and Ppk is approxin1ately equal to
Pl'. Both of these conditions arc indicators that the process is well
centered.
• All indices are relatively high indicating that the process is capable
of producing near-zero nonconfonnanccs if the process remains in
statistical control.
• Since the C11 and PP are approximately equal it implies minimal
between-subgroup variation.
• A large discrepancy between C'pk and PP 1, would indicate the presence
of excessive between-subgroup variation.
• A large discrepancy between C11 and C~pk (or between Pr and J>P 1J
would indicate a process centering problem.

NOTE: The process variability is an integral part of the capability index

calculations, hence it is important to be consistent in choosing the
method to calculate the within·subgroup variability. As the table below
shows there are two ways to estimate the process variability (d"c) and its
effect on the Cpk calculations. Both are correct; i.e., both are valid
estimates of the "true" variation. Use Ycl. if an }(and R chart is used

to collect the data and x4 if an xands chart is used.

~~
Method for calculating 6"c Summary of Results
Within-subgroup Variation

%, 0.1799 1.so I

x '
4
0.1820
-·
1.78
I

NOTE: The total variation standard deviation value (0-1' = 0.1890) is

not affected by the methodology used to estimate within-subgroup
variation.

190
 Appendix G
Glo~;~:ary of Terms and Syn1bols

APPENDIX G
Glossary of Terms and Symbols

Terms Used in This Manual

ARMA Control Chart The Autoregressive Moving Average Control Chart is a control
chart which uses a rcgress1011 111odel lo account for
interrelationship among the data. It may be used in cases where
the assumption that the sample data are independent is violated.
Attributes Data Qualitative data that can be categorized for recording and
analysis. Examples include characteristics such as: the
presence of a required label, the installation of all required
fasteners, the absence of errors on an expense report. Other
examples are characteristics that are inherently measurable
(i.e., could be treated as vm'iables data), but where the
results are recorded in a simple yes/no fashion, such as
acceptability of a shaft diameter when checked on a go/no-
go gage, or the presence of any engineering changes on a
drawing. Attributes data are usually gathered in the form of
nonconfo1ming units or of nonconfonnities; they are
analyzed by p, np, c and u control charts (see also Variables
Data).

Autocorrelation The degree of relationship between elements of a stationary

time series.

Average (see also Mean) The sum of values divided by the number (sample size) of
values. It is designated by a bar over the symbol for the
values being averaged. For example:
o X (X-bar) is the average of the X values within a
subgroup;
=
0 X (X double bar) is the average of subgroup averages
(X );

0 ffi (X tilde-bar) is the average of subgroup medians;

0 R (R-bar) is the average of subgroup ranges.

Average Run Length The number of sample subgroups expected between out-of-
control signals. The in-control Average Run Length

191
Appendix G
Glossary ofTcrcns and Sy111bols

( ARL0 ) is the expected number of subgroup samples

between false alanns.

Between-subgroup Variation See Variation.

Binomial Distribution A discrete probability distribution for attributes data that

applies lo conforming and nonconfom1ing units and
underlies the p and np charts.

Cause and Effect Diagram A simple tool for individual or group problem solving that
uses a graphic description of the various process elements
to analyze potential sources of process variation. Also
called fishbone diagram (after its appearance) or Ishikawa
diagram (after its developer).

Centerline The line on a control chart that represents the average value
of the items being plotted.

Characteristic A distinguishing feature of a process or its output

Common Cause A source of variation that affects all the individnal values
of the process output being studied; this is the source of the
inherent process variation.

Confidence Interval An interval or range of values, calculated from sample data,

that contains, with a (I 00 .. a) degree of certainty, the
population parameter of interest, e.g., the true population
average. a, called the Level of Significance, is the
probability of committing a Type I error. See Montgomery
( 1997) or Juran and Godfrey (1999) for calculation
methods.

Consecutive Units of output produced m succession; a basis for

selecting subgroup samples.

Continual Improvement The operational philosophy that makes best use of the
talents within the Company to produce products of
increasing quality for our customers in an increasingly
efficient way that protects the return on investment to our
stockholders. This is a dynamic strategy designed lo

192
 Appendix G
Glossary of Tcnns and Syn1bols

enhance the strength of the Company in the face of present

and future market conditions. It contrasts with any static
strategy that accepts (explicitly or implicitly) some
particular level of outgoing nonconformances as inevitable.

Control See Statistical Control.

Control Chart A graphic representation of a characteristic of a process,

showing plotted values of some statistic gathered from that
characteristic, a centerline, and one or two control limits. It
minimizes the net economic loss from Type I and Type II
errors. It has two basic uses: as a judgment to detennine if a
process has been operating in statistical control, and to aid
in maintaining statistical control.

Control Limit A line (or lines) on a control chal1 used as a basis for
judging the stability of a process. Variation beyond a
control limit is evidence that special causes arc affecting
the process. Control limits are calculated from process data
and are not to be confused with engineering specifications.

Control Statistic The statistic used in developing and using a control chart.
A value calculated from or based upon sample data (e.g., a
subgroup average or range), used to make inferences about
the process that produced the output rrom which the sample
came.
Convenience Sampling A sample scheme wherein the samples are collected using
an approach which makes it "easy" to collect the samples
but does not ret1ect the nature of potential special causes
which could affect the process. Examples of this are
collecting samples just before a break period, or from the
top of a bin, pallet or other storage container. This type of
sampling is not appropriate for process analysis or control
because it can lead to a biased result and consequently a
possible erroneous decision.

Correlation The degree of relationship between variables.

Correlation Matrix A matrix of all possible correlations of factors under

consideration.

193
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Syn1bols

CUSUM Control Chart A control chart approach that uses the current and recent
past process data to detect small to moderate shifts in the
process average or variability. CUSUM stands for
"cumulative sum" of deviations from the target and puts
equal weight on the current and recent past data.

Datum The singular of "data". A single point in a series of data.

Not to be confused with the word as used within Geometric
Dimensioning & Tolerancing (GD&T).

Detection A reactive (past-oriented) strategy that attempts to identify

unacceptable output after it has been produced and then
separate it from acceptable output (see also Prevention).

Dispersion See Process Spread.

Distribution A way of describing the output of a stable system of

variation, in which individual values as a group form a
pattern that can be described in terms of its location,
spread, and shape. Location is commonly expressed by the
mean or average, or by the median; spread is expressed in
tenns of the standard deviation or the range of a sample;
shape involves many characteristics such as symmetry
(skewness) and peakedness (km1osis). These are often
summarized by using the name of a common distribmion
such as the normal, binomial, or poisson.

EWMA Control Chart The Exponentially Weight Moving Average Control Chart
is an approach to detect small shifts in the process location.
It uses as a statistic to monitor the process location the
exponentially weighted moving average.

Haphazard Sampling A sample scheme wherein the samples are collected using
an unsystematic, indiscriminant, unplanned, and/or chaotic
approach. This type of sampling is not appropriate for
process analysis or control because it can lead to a biased
result and consequently a possible erroneous decision.

Individual A single unit, or a single measurement of a characteristic,

often denoted by the symbol X.

194
 Appendix G
Glossary or T~nns and Symbols

Inherent Variation See Variation.

Location A general term for the typical values of central tendency of

a distribution.

Loss Function A graphical representation of the relationship between the

customer's sensitivity (loss) and deviations from the target
(design intent). This analysis is conducted without
considering the specifications.

Mean A measure of location. The average of values in a group of

measurements.

MCUSUM Control Chart The Multivariate Cumulative Sum Control Chart is the
application of the CUSUM Control Chart approach to
multivariate situations.

Median A measure of location. The middle value in a group of

measurements. when arranged from lowest Lo highest. If the
number of values is even, by convention the average of the
middle two values is used as the median. Subgroup
medians form the basis for a simple control chart for
process location. Medians are designated by a tilde(~) over
the symbol for the individual values: ffi is the median of a
subgroup.

MEWMA Control Chart The Multivariate Exponentially Weight Moving Average

Control Chm1 is the application of the EWMA Control
Chart approach to multivariate situations.

Mode A measure of location defined by the value that occurs

most frequently in a distribution or data set (there may be
more than one mode within one data set).

Moving Range A measure of process spread. The difference between the

highest and lowest value among two or more successive
samples. As each additional datum point (sample) is
obtained, the range associated with that point is computed
by adding the new point and deleting the 'oldest'
chronological point, so that each range calculation has at
least one shared point from the previous range calculation.

195
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms anr.l Sy1nhois

Typically, the moving range is used in concert with control

charts for individuals and uses two-point (consecutive
points) moving ranges,

Multivariate Control Chart The genre of control charts that have been developed to
monitor and control processes that are more appropriately
modeled with a multivariate distribution rather than
multiple univariate distributions,

Nonconforming Units Units which do not conform to a specification or other

inspection standard; p and np control charts are used to
analyze systems producing nonconforming units,

Nonconformity A specific occrnTencc of a condition which does not

conform to a specification or other inspection standard, An
individual nonconfom1ing unit can have more than one
nonconformity, For example, a door could have several
dents and dings plus a malfunctioning handle; a functional
check of a HY AC unit could reveal any of a number of
potential discrepancies, c and u control charts are used to
analyze systems producing nonconformities,

Non-Normal Control Chart A control chart approach in which adjustments are made to
the data or the control limits to allow process control
similar to that of Shcwhart charts while compensating for
the characteristics of a non-nonnal distribution,

Non-Normal Distribution A probability distribution that does not follow the normal
form; i,e,, a distribution where the moments greater than
order two are not all zero,

Normal Distribution A continuous, symmetrical, bell-shaped frequency

distribution for variables data that is the basis for the
control charts for variables,

Pre-Control An application of probabilistic analysis to product

(nonconformance) control using two data points within
each sample,

196
 Appendix G
Glossary nrTcnTlS and Syn1hoh;

Operational Definition A means of clearly communicating quality expectations

and performance; it consists of
(I) a criterion to be applied to an object or to a b'Toup,
(2) a test of the object or of the group,
(3) a decision: yes or no - the object or the group did or did
not meet the criterion.''

Over-adjustment Tampering; taking action on a process when the process is

actually in statistical control. Ascribing a variation or a
mistake to a special cause, when in fact the cause belongs
to the system (common causes).

Pareto Chart A simple tool for problem solving that involves ranking all
potential problem areas or sources of variation according to
their contribution to cost or to total variation. Typically, a
few causes account for most of the cost (or variation), so
problem-solving efforts are best prioritized to concentrate
on the "vital few" causes, temporarily ignoring the "trivial
rnany".

Point Estimate A statistic (single number) calculated from sample data

(e.g., average or standard deviation) for which there is
some expectation that it is "close" to the population
parameter it estimates.

Poisson Distribution A discrete probability distribution for attributes data that

applies to nonconfom1ities and underlies the c and u control
charts.

Prediction Interval Once a regression model is established for a population, the

response, y, can be predicted for future values (samples) of
the regressor variable(s), x 0 , x 1, ..• x,,.
The interval for (I 00 - a) confidence in this prediction is
called the prediction interval.

Prevention A proactive (future-oriented) strategy that improves quality

and productivity by directing analysis and action toward
correcting the process itself. Prevention is consistent with a
philosophy of continual improvement (see also Detection).

55
See Deming (l 982).

197
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Symbois

Probability Based Charts An approach which uses analysis and charts based on
categorical data and the probabilities related to the
categories for the control and analysis of products and
processes.
Probability Sampling See Random Sampling.

Problem Solving The process of moving from symptoms to causes (special

or common) to actions. Among the basic techniques that
can be used are Pareto charts, cause-and-effect diagrams
and statistical process control techniques.

Process The combination of people, equipment, materials, methods,

measurement and environment that produce output - a
given product or service. A process can involve any aspect
of the business. "6M's" is a catch phrase sometimes used
to describe a process: Man, Material, Method, Machine,
Mother Nature, Measurement

Process Average The location of the distribution of measured values of a

particular process characteristic, usually designated as an
overall average, X •

Process Capability The 6 6 range of inherent process variation.

Variables Data Case

This is defined as 6 ac .
Attributes Data Case
This is usually defined as the average proportion or rate of
nonconformances or nonconformities.

Process Control See Statistical Process Control.

Process Performance The 66 range of total process variation.

Process Spread The extent to which the distribution of individual values of

the process characteristic vary; often shown as the process
average plus or minus some number of standard deviations
(X ± 36).

198
 Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Syrnbols

Quadratic Of or pertaining to a second order mathematical model; a

common graphical example is a parabola.

Randomness A condition in which no pattern in the data can be

discerned.

Random Sampling A random sample is one in which every sample point has
the same chance (probability) of being selected. A random
sample is systematic and planned; that is, all sample points
are determined before any data are collected.
The process of selecting units for a sample of size n, in
such a manner that each /1 unit under consideration has an
equal chance of being selected in the sample.
Convenience Sampling:
See Convenience Sampling
Haphazard Sampling:
See Haphazard Sampling
Range A measure of process spread. The difference bet ween the
highest and lowest values in a subgroup, a sample, or a
population.

Rational Subgroup A subgroup gathered in such a manner as to give the

maximum chance for the measurements in each subgroup
to be alike and the maximum chance for the subgroups to
differ one from the other. This subgrouping scheme enables
a determination of whether the process variation includes
special cause variation.

Regression Control Chart Regression Control Charts are used to monitor the
relationship between two correlated variables in order to
determine if and when deviation from the known
predictable relationship occurs.

Residuals Control Chart A chart that monitors a process using the residuals
(differences) between a fitted model and the data. A
process shift will cause a shift in the mean of the residuals.

199
Appendix G
Glossary nfTenT1s and Syn1bob

Run A consecutive number of points consistently increasing or

decreasing, or above or below the centerline. This can be
evidence of the existence of special causes of variation.

Sample See Subgroup.

Shape A general concept for the overall pattern formed by a

distribution of values. Shape involves many characteristics
such as symmetry (skewness) and peakedness (kurtosis).

Short Run Control Chart A control chart approach in which adjustments are made to
the data or the control limits to allow process control
similar lo that of Shewhart charts for processes that only
produce a small number of products during a single run

Sigma ( G) The Greek letter used to designate a standard deviation of a

population.

Special Cause A source of variation that affects only some of the output of
the process; it is often inte1111ittent and unpredictable. A
special cause is sometimes called assignable cause. It is
signaled by one or more points beyond the control limits or
a non-random pattern of points within the control limits.

Specification The engineering requirement for judging acceptability of a

particular characteristic. A specification must never be
confused with a control limit. Ideally, a specification ties
directly to or is compatible with the customer's (internal
and/or external) requirements and expectations.
Bilateral:
A bilateral specification identifies requirements at both
extremes of the process range. Often referred to as a two-
sided specification or tolerance.
Unilateral:
A unilateral specification identifies requirements at only
one extreme of the process range. Often referred to as a
one-sided specification or tolerance.

200
 Appendix G
Glossary of Ten11s and Symbols

Spread The expected span of values from smallest to largest in a

distribution (sec also Process Spread).

Stability The absence of special causes of vmiation; the property of

being in statistical control.

Stable Process A process that is in statistical control.

Standard Deviation A measure of the spread of the process output or the spread
of a sampling statistic from the process (e.g., of subgroup
averages).

Statistic A value calculated from or based upon sample data (e.g., a

subgroup average or range) used to make inferences about
the process that produced the output.

Statistical Control The condition describing a process from which the effect of
all special causes of variation have been eliminated and
only that due to common causes remain; i.e., observed
variation can be attributed to a constant system of chance
causes. This is evidenced on a control chart by the absence
of points beyond the control limits and by the absence of
non-random patterns within the control limits.

Statistical Inference Information about population parameters is estimated or

inferred from data obtained from a sample of that
population. These inferences can be in the form of a single
number (point estimate) or a pair of numbers (interval
estimate).

Statistical Process Control The use of statistical techniques such as control charts to
analyze a process or its output so as to take appropriate
actions to achieve and maintain a state of statistical control
and to improve the process capability.

Statistical Tolerance Limits An interval or range of values that is expected to contain a

specified proportion of a population. See Montgomery
(1997) or Juran and Godfrey (1999) for calculation
methods. See Tolerance Interval.

201
Appendix G
Glossary ofTern1s and Sy111hob

Stoplight Control Chart A probability based chart approach to process control that
uses three categories and double sampling, In this approach
the target area is designated green, the warning areas as
yellow, and the stop zones as red, The use of these colors
gives rise to the "stoplight" designation,

Subgroup One or more observations or measurements used to analyze

the performance of a process, Rational subgroups are
usually chosen so that the variation represented within each
subgroup is as small as feasible for the process
(representing the variation from common causes), and so
that any changes in the process perfonnance (i,e,, special
causes) will appear as differences between subgroups,
Rational subgroups arc typically made up of consecutive
pieces, although random samples arc sometimes used,

Tolerance See Specification,

Tolerance Interval Sec Statistical Tolerance Limits,

Total Process Variation See Variation,

Type I Error Rejecting an assumption that is true; c,g,, taking action

appropriate for a special cause when in fact the process has
not changed (over-control), This is associated with the
producer's or alpha risk,

Type II Error Failing to reject an assumption that is false; e,g,, not taking
appropriate action when in fact the process is affected by
special causes (under-control), This is associated with the
consumer's risk or beta risk,

Unimodal A distribution is said to be unimodal if it has only one

mode,

Variables Data Quantitative data, where measurements are used for

analysis, Examples include the diameter of a bearing
journal in millimeters, the closing effort of a door in
Newtons, the concentration of electrolyte in percent, or the
torque of a fastener in Newton-meters, X and R , X and
s, median and range, and individuals and moving range
control charts are used for variables data, See also

202
 A.ppcndix G
(!Jossary of Terms and Symbols

Attributes Data. (The term "Variables", although

awkward sounding, is used in order to distinguish the
difference between something that varies, and the control
chart used for data taken from a continuous variable).

Variation The inevitable differences among individual outputs of a

process; the sources of variation can be grouped into two
major classes: Common Causes and Special Causes.
Inherent Variation:
That process variation due to common causes only.
Within-subgroup Variation:
'fhis is the variation due only to the variation within the
subgroups. If the process is in statistical control this variation is
a good estimate of the inherent process variation. It can be

estimated from control charts by % Y.2

or
4
.

Between-subgroup Variation:
This is the variation due to the variation between
subgroups. If the process is in statistical control this
variation should be zero.
Total Process Variation:
This is the variation due to both within-subgroup and
between-subgroup variation. If the process is not in
statistical control the total process variation will include the
effect of the special cause(s) as well as the common causes.
This variation may be estimated bys, the sample standard
deviation, using all of the individual readings obtained
from either a detailed control chart or a process study:
'
<JP =s= ~
L..J (x, - x)' where xi is . d.1v1"d ua 1 read.1ng,
. an 1n
i n-l
xis the average of the individual readings, and n is the
total number of individual readings.
Within-subgroup Variation See Variation.

Zone Analysis This is a method of detailed analysis of a Shewhart control

chart which divides the X chart between the control limits
into three equidistant zones above the mean and three
56
eqm.d.1stant zones be 1ow the mean.

56
See also AT&T. ( l 984).

203
Appendix CT
Glossary ofTern1s and Symbols

Symbols
as Used in This Manual
A, A multiplier of R used to calculate the control limits for
averages; tabled in Appendix E.

A multiplier of R used to calculate the control limits for

medians; tabled in Appendix E.

A A multiplier of s used to calculate the control limits for

averages; tabled in Appendix E.

Multipliers of s used to calculate the lower and upper

control limits, respectively, for sample standard deviations;
tabled in Appendix E.

The number of nonconformities in a sample. The c chart is

described in Chapter IT, Section C.

The average number of nonconfonnities in samples of

constant size n.

The divisor of s used to estimate the process standard

deviation; tabled in Appendix E.

The capability index for a stable process, typically defined

(USL-LSL)
as-'-----~

cpk The capability index for a stable process, typically defined

as the minimum of CPU or CPL.

CPL The lower capability index, typically defined as

(X -LSL)
30-c

204
 Appendix G
Glossary of Tenns and Symhols

CPU The upper capability index, typically defined as

(USL-X)

CR The capability ratio for a stable process, typically defined

I
as-.
C'11

A divisor of R used to estimate the process standard

deviation; tabled in Appendix E.

Multipliers of R used to calculate the lower and upper

control limits, respectively, for ranges; tabled in Appendix
E.

E, A multiplier of the average moving range, MR ,used to

calculate control limits for individuals; tabled in Appendix
E.

k The number or subgroups being used to calculate control

limits.

LCL The lower control limit; LCLx, LCL11 , LCLP, etc., are,
respectively, the lower control limits for averages, ranges,
proportion nonconfonning, etc.

LSL The lower engineering specification limit.

MR The moving range of a series of data points used primarily

on a chart for individuals.

n The number of individuals m a subgroup; the subgroup

sample size.

205
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Sy1nbols

The average subgroup sample size; typically used 111

attributes charts with varying subgroup sample sizes

The number of nonconfo1ming items in a sample of size n.

The np chart is described in Chapter TI, Section C.

np The average number of nonconfonning items in samples of

constant size 11.

p The proportion of units nonconfonning in a sample. The p-

chart is discussed in Chapter 11, Section C.

p The average proportion of units nonconforming in a series

of samples.

(USL-LSL)
The performance index, typically defined as

p pk The performance index, typically defined as the minimum

of PPU or PPL.

PPL The lower performance index, typically defined as

(X -LSL)
36'p

PPU The upper performance index, typically defined as

(USL-X)
36'p

l
PR The performance ratio, typically defined as - .
p ,,

The proportion of output beyond a point of interest, such as

a particular specification limit, z standard deviation units
away from the process average.

206
 Appendix G
Glossary of Tcm1s and Symhols

R The subgroup range (highest minus lowest value); the R

chart is discussed in Chapter 11, Section C.

R The average range of a series of subgroups of constant size.

s The sample standard deviation for subgroups; the ,1·-chart is

discussed in Chapter II, Section C.
The sample standard deviation for processes; s is discussed
in Chapter IV, Section A.

s The average sample standard deviation of a scnes of

subgroups, weighted if necessary by sample size.

SL A unilateral engineering specification limit.

u The number of nonconformities per unit in a sample which

may contain more than one unit. The u chart is discussed in
Chapter II, Section C.
u The average number of nonconformities per unit in samples
not necessarily of the same size.

UCL The upper control limit; UCLx, UCLii, UCLP, etc., arc,
respectively, the upper control limits for averages, ranges,
proportion nonconforming, etc.

USL The upper engineering specification limit.

x An individual value. The chart for individuals is discussed

in Chapter 11, Section C.

x The average of values in a subgroup. The X -chart 1s

discussed in Chapter II, Section C.

207
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Symbols

x The average of subgroup averages (weighted if necessary

by sample size); the measured process average.

The median of values in a subgroup; the chart for medians

is discussed in Chapter II, Section C. This is pronounced as
"x tilde".

The average of subgroup medians; the estimated process

median. This is pronounced as "x tilde bar".

The number of standard deviation units from the process

average to a valne of interest such as an engineering
specification. When used in capability assessment, zusL is
the distance to the upper specification limit, z Lst. is the
distance to the lower specification limit, and -mm 1s the
distance to the nearest specification limit.

The Greek letter sigma used to designate a standard

deviation of a population.

The standard deviation of a statistic based on sample

process output, such as the standard deviation of the
distribution of subgroup averages the standard deviation of
the distribution of subgroup ranges, the standard deviation
of the distribution of number of nonconfonning items, etc.

An estimate of the standard deviation of a process

characteristic.

The estimate of the standard deviation of a process usmg

the sample standard deviation of a set of individuals about
the average of the set. This is an estimate of the total
process variation of the process.

The estimate of the standard deviation of a stable process

using the average range of subgrouped samples taken from
the process, usually within the context of control charts,

208
 Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Sy1nbols

where the d 2 factor is tabled in Appendix E. This is the

within-subgroup variation and an estimate of the inherent
variation of the process.

209
Appendix G
Glossary of Terms and Syn1hols

This page intentionally left blank

21 ()
 APPENDIXH
References and Suggested Readings

APPENDIX H
57
References and Suggested Readings

American National Standards Committee Z-1 (1996). Guide j(;r Qualilv Control Char1.1·; Control Chart
Method oj'Ana!_vzing Data; C'ontrol C'hart Method oj'C'ontrolling Quality During Production, American
Society for Quality (ASQ), Milwaukee, WI.

ASQC Statistics Division, Statistical "How-To" Techniques Series, ASQC Quality Press ( 15 Volumes),
l 979-199L

ASQC (1987). Definitions, Symhols, Formulas, and Tahlesfr!r Control Charts, ANSI/ASQC Al-1987.

ASTM International (2002). Manual on Presentalion of Data and Control Chart i\nalvsis (STP-1 SD).
7th edition. 'ix .

AT&T Technologies, Inc. ( 1984 ). Statislical Quali1v Control Handlmok. AT&T Technologies, Inc.
(originally published by Western Electric Co., Inc., 1956).

Bhote, K.R. (1991 ). World Class Qualitv'. AMACOM, New York.

Bothe, D. (2001). Measuring Process Capability. Landmark Publishing, Cedarburg, WI.

Box, G.E.P., Jenkins, G.M. and Rcinscl, G.C. (1994). Time Series Analysis, Forecasting and Control.
Third Edition. Prentice Hall.

Bissell, B.A.F. (1990). "How Reliable Is Your Capability Index'?", i\pplied Statistics, Vol. 39, 1990, pp.
331-340.

Boyles, R.A. (1991). "The Taguchi Capability lndex",Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. 23, 1991, pp.
17-26.

Box, G.E.P. and Cox, D.R. (1964). "An Analysis of Transformations", J. Royal Stat. Soc., Series B,
V26, p. 211

Brase, C.H., and Brase, C.P. (1999). Understanding Statistics, 6'h edition, Houghton Mifflin Company,
New York.

Burr, I.W. (1942). "Cumulative Frequency Distributions", Annals of"Mathemarical Statislics, Vol. 13,
pp, 215-232.

Burr, I.W. (1967). "The Effect Of Non-Normality On Constants For Charts", Industrial Qualily Control,
May, pp. 563-569.

57
See Freund and Williams (1966) for an extensive listing of statistical terms and definitions.
58
Available from the ASTM International, 100 Barr Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

211
APPENDJXH
References mid Sugg_c:.;tcd Readings

Chan, L.J., Cheng, S.W. and. Spiring, F.A. (1988). "A New Measure of Process Capability: Cpm",
Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. 20, No. 3, 1988, pp. 162.. 175.

Chan, L.K., and Cui, H.J. (2003). "Skewness Correction charts for Skewed Distributions", Naval
Research Logistics, Volume 50, Issue 6, pp. 555 - 573.

Champ, C.W., and Rigdon, S.E. (1997). "An Analysis of the Run Sum Control Chart", Journal of
Quality Technology. Vol. 29, No. 4.

Charbonneau, H.C. and Gordon, L.W. (1978). Induslrial Quality Control, Prentice-Hall, Inc.

Chrysler, Ford, and General Motors ( 1995). Advanced Product Quality Planning Manual, AIAG.

DaimlerChrysler, Ford, and General Motors (2003). Measurement Systems Analysis Reficrence Manual,
AIAG.

Davis, R.B., Homer, A., and Woodall, W.H. (l 990). "Performance of the Zone Control Chart",
Communications in Statistics -Theory and Methods, I 9, pp. 1581-1587.

Deming, W. Edwards (1950). Some Theory of'Sampling, Dover Publications Inc., New York.

Deming, W. Edwards ( 1967). "What Happened in Japano", Industrial Quality Control, Vol. 24, No. 3,
August, pp. 89-93.

Deming, W. Edwards ( 1982). Qualiry, Producliviry and Comperitive Posirion, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, Center for Advanced Engineering Study.

Deming, W. Edwards ( 19R9). Out o/ !he Crisis, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Center for
Advanced Engineering Study.

Deming, W. Edwards (1994). New £conom.ics:j(Jr Industry, Government, Education, Massachusetts

Institute of Technology, Center for Advanced Engineering Study.

Dixon, W.J and Massey, F.J., Jr. (1969). Introduction to Statistical Analysis, Third Edition,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.

Doty, L.A. ( 199 I). Statistical Process Control, ;\SQ Quality Press, Milwaukee WI.

Dovich, R.A. ( 1991). Statistical Terrorists, Quality in Manufacturing Magazine, March-April, I 991.

Duncan, A.J. (1974). Quality Control and Industrial Statislics, 5th ed., Richard D. Irwin, Inc.

English, J.R., Lee, S., Martin, T.W., Tilmon, C. (2000). "Detecting Changes In Autoregressive Processes
with X and EWMA charts", f!E Transactions, December.

Farnum, N.R. (1992). "Control Charts for Short Runs: Nonconstant Process and Measurement Error",
Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. 24.

212
 APPENDJX H
References and Suggested Readings

Fellers, G., ( 1991 ). SPC j{!r Practitioners: Special Cases and Continuous Processes, ASQ Quality Press,
Milwaukee, WI.

Freund, J.E. and Williams, F.J. (1966). Dictionary/Outline a/Basic Statistics, Reprint. Originally
published: McGraw .. Hill, New York. Dover edition 1991.

General Motors Corporation ( 1991 ). Key Characteristics Designation System, GM-1805 QN.

Grant, E.L. and. Leavenworth, R.S. ( 1980). Statistical Quality Control, 7th ed., McGraw-· Hill, Inc.

Gruska, G.F., Mirkhani, K., and Lamberson, LR. ( 1973). Point Estimation Samples, The Third
Generation, Inc. Troy, ML

Gruska, G.F. (2004). Enumerative vs. Analytic Studies, Omnex, Ann Arbor, Ml.

Gunter, B. (1989). "Use and Abuse ofCp(. 4 parts, Quality Progress, .January 1989, March 1989, May
1989 and .July 1989.

Heaphy, M.S. and Gruska, G.F., (1982). "Markovian Analysis of Sequenced Sampling'", 36th AQC
Transactions, ASQC.

]-Jerman, J.T. (1989). "Capability Index-Enough for Process Industries?", Proceeding.1, ASQC 43rd
AQC.

Ishikawa, K. (1976). Guide to Quality Control, Asian Productivity Organization, Revised Edition.

Jaehn, A.H. (1991 ). "The Zone Control Chart", Quality Progress, Vol. 24, No. 7, pp. 65-68.

Johnson, N.L. (1949). "Systems of Frequency Curves Generated by Methods of Translation,"

Biometrika, Vol 36, pp. 149-176 .

.Juran, J. and Godfrey A.B. (1999). Quality Handbook, 5th ed., McGraw-Hill, Inc.

Kane, V.E. (1989). De/ect Prevention- Use of Simple Statistical Tools, Marcel Dekker, lnc. and ASQC
Quality Press.

Keats, J.B. and Montgomery D. C. (1991). Statistical Process Control in Manufacturing, ASQ Quality
Press, Milwaukee, WI.

Kourti, T., MacGregor, J.F. (1996). "Multivariate SPC Methods for Process and Product Monitoring",
Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. 28, No. 4.

Lowry, C.A., Woodall, W.H., Champ, C.W., and Rigdon, S.E. (1992). "A Multivariate Exponentially
Weighted Moving Average Control Chart", Technometrics, 34, pp. 46-53.

Lowry, C.A. and Montgomery, D.C. (1995). "A Review Of Multivariate Control Charts", TIE
Transactions, 27, pp. 800.

213
APPENDIX 11
References and Suggested Readings

Mauch, P,O, (1991). Basic SPC: A Guide For the Service Industries, ASQ Quality Press, Milwaukee,
WI.

Mason, R.L and Young, J.C. (2001 ). "Implementing Multivariate Statistical Process Control Using
Hotelling's T 2 Statistic", Quality Progress.

Montgomery, D.C. ( 1997). Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 3rd ed., John Wiley, New York.

Ott, E.R. (1975). Process Quality Control, McGraw-Hill, Inc.

Pham, II., (2001). Recent Advances In Reliabi/ify And Qualify £.'ngincering, Series on Quality,
Reliability and Engineering Statistics - Vol. 2, World Scientific.

Reynolds, J.H. (1971 ). "The Run Sum Control Chart Procedure", Journal of Qualify Technology Vol 3,
pp. 23-27.

Roberts., S.W. (1966). "A Comparison of Some Control Chart Procedures", Technametrics, Vol R, pp.
411-430.

Scherkenbach, W.W. (1991 ). Demini's Road ro Continual Improverncnt, SPC Press, Knoxville TN.

Shewhart, Walter A. (1931). Economic Control of' Quality of Manufactured Product, Van Nostrand;
republished ASQ Quality Press , ( 1980), Milwaukee, WI..

Spiring, F.A (1991 ). Assessing Process Capability in the Presence of Systematic Assignable Cause,
Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. 23, No. 2, April, 1991.

Wadsworth, H.M. (1989). Handhook of' Statistical Methods for lOnfiineers and Scientists, McGrnw-Hill,
New York.

Wheeler, D.J. (1991). Short run SPC, SPC Press, Knoxville, TN.

Wheeler, D.J. (1995). Advanced Topics in Statistical Process Control, SPC Press, Knoxville TN.

Wheeler, DJ. and Chambers, D.S. (1986). Understandinfi Statistical Process Control, 2nd ed., SPC
Press, Knoxville, TN.

Wheeler, D.J. (1999). Beyond Capability Confusion, SPC Press, Knoxville, TN.

Wise, S.A. and Fair, D.C. (1998). Innovative Control Charting, ASQ Quality Press, Milwaukee, WI.

214
APPENDIX J
Standard Normal Tables

APPENDIX I
Standard Normal Tables
lzl x.xO x.xl x.x2 x.x3 x.x4 x.xS x.x6 x.x7 x.x8 x.x9
0.0 0.50000000 0.50398940 0.50797830 0.51196650 0.51595340 0.51993880 0.52392220 0.52790320 0.53188140 0.53585640
0.1 0.53982780 0.54379530 0.54775840 0.55171680 0.55567000 0.55961770 0.56355950 0.56749490 0.57142370 0.57534540
0.2 0.57925970 0.58316620 0.58706440 0.59095410 0.59483490 0.59870630 0.60256810 0.60641990 0.6 ](126120 0.61409190
0.3 0.61791140 0.62171950 0.62551580 0.62930000 0.63307170 0.63683070 0.64057640 0.64430880 0.64802730 0.65173170
0.4 0.65542170 0.65909700 0.66275730 0.66640220 0.67003140 0.67364480 0.67724190 0.68082250 0.68438630 0.687933 lO
-~·

0.5 0.69146250 0.69497430 0.69846820 0.70194400 0.70540150 0.70884030 0.71226030 0.71566120 0.71904270 0.72240470
0.6 0.72574690 0.72906910 0.73237110 0. 73565270 0.73891370 0.74215390 0.745373 lll 0.748571 \0 0.15174780 0.75490290
0.7 0.75803630 0.76114790 0.76423750 0.76730490 0. 77035000 ' 0.77337260 0.77637270 0.77935010 0.18230460 0.78523610
0.8 0.78814460 0.79 !02990 0.79389190 0.79673060 0.79954580 0.80233750 0.80510550 0.80784980 0.81057030 0.81326710
0.9 0.81593990 0.81858870 0.82121360 0.82381450 0.82639120 0.82894390 0.83147240 0.83397680 0.83645690 0.83891290
1.0 0.84134470 0.84375240 0.84613580 0.84849500 0.85083000 0.85314090 0.85542770 0.85769030 0.85992890 0.862 I 4340
I.I 0.86433390 0.86650050 0.86864310 0.87076190 0.87285680 0.87492810 0.87697560 0.87899950 0.88099990 0.88297680
].2 0.88493030 0.88686060 0.88876760 0.89065140 0.89251230 0.89435020 0.89616530 0.89795770 0.89972740 0.90147470
1.3 0.90319950 0.90490210 0.90658250 0.90824090 0.90987730 0. 91 I 49200 0.91308500 0.91465650 0.91620670 0.91773560
1.4 0.91924330 0.92073020 0.92219620 0.92364150 0.92506630 0.92647070 0.92785500 0.92921910 0.93056340 0.93188790
1.5 0.93319280 0.93447830 0.93574450 0.93699160 0.93821980 ! 0.93942920 0.94062010 0.94179240 0.94294660 0.94408260
1.6 0.94520070 0.94630110 0.94738390 0.94844930 0.94949740 ! 0.95052850 0.95154280 0.95254030 0.95352130 0.95448600
1.7 0.95543450 0.95636710 0.95728380 0.95818490 0.95907050 0.95994080 0.96079610 0.96163640 0.96246200 0.96327300
··~

1.8 0.96406970 0.96485210 0.96562050 0.96637500 0.96711590 0.96784320 0.96855720 0.96925810 0.96994600 0.97062100
·-·
1.9 0.97128340 0.97193340 0.97257110 0.97319660 0.97381020 0.97441190 0.97500210 0.97558080 0.97614820 0.97670450
2.0 0.97724990 0.97778440 0.97830830 0.97882170 0.97932480 0.97981780 0.98030070 11.98077380 0.98123720 0.98169110
2.1 0.98213560 0.98257080 0.98299700 0.98341420 i 0.983822611 0.98422240 0.98461370 0.98499660 0.98537130 0.98573790
2.2 0.98609660 0.98644740 0.98679060 0.98712630 0.98745450 0.98777550 0.98808940 0.98839620 0.98869620 0.98898930
2.3 0.98927590 0.98955590 0.98982960 0.99009690 ·~ 0.99035810 0.99061330 0.99086250 0.99110600 0.99134370 0.99157580
2.4 0.99180250 0.99202370 0.99223970 0.99245060 ' 0.99265640 0 99285720 0.993053 JO 0.99324430 0.99343090 0.99361280
2.5 0.99379030 0.99396340 0.99413230 0.99429690 0.99445740 I 0.99461390 0.99476640 0.994915!0 0.99506000 11.99520120
2.6 0.99533880 0.99547290 0.99560350 0.99573080 0.99585470 0.99597540 0.99609300 0.99620740 0.99631890 0.99642740
2.7 0.99653300 0.99663580 0.99673590 0.99683330 I 0.99692800 11.99702020 0.99710990 11.99719720 0.997282!0 0.997364611
2.8 ll.99744490 0.99752290 0.99759880 0.99767260 0.99774430 I 0.99781400 0.99788180 0.99794760 0.99801160 0.998117380
2.9 0.99813420 0.99819290 0.99824980 0.99830520 0.99835890 11.998411 JO 0.99846180 0.99851 JOO 11.99855880 0.99860510
3.0 0.99865010 0.99869380 I 0.99873610 0.99877720
~
0.99881710 0.99885580 0.99889330 0.99892970 0.99896500 0.99899920
·~

215
 APPENDIX I
Standard Nonna] Tables

··-·~-· .----------~-~ .. ~

jcj x.xO x.xl x.x2 x.x3 x.x4 x.x5 x.x6 x.x7 x.x8 x.x9
3.J 0.99903240 0.99906460 0.99909570 0.99912600 i 0.99915530 0 99918360 0.99921120 0.99923780 0.99926360 0.99928860
3.2 0.99931290 0.99933630 0.99935900 0.99938100 0.99940240 0.99942300 0.99944290 0.99946230 0.99948100 0.99949910
3.3 0.99951660 0.99953350 0.99954990 0.99956580 ·10.99958110 0.99959590 0.99961030 0.99962420 0.99963760 0.99965050
3.4 0.99966310 0.99967520 0.99968690 0.99969820 0.99970910 0.99971970 0.99972990 0.99973980 0.99974930 0.99975850
3.5 0.99976740 0.99977590 0.99978420 0.99979220 0.99979990 0.99980740 0.99981460 0.99982150 0.99982820 0.99983470
3.6 0.99984090 0.99984690 0.99985270 0.99985830 0.99986370 0.99986890 0.99987390 0.99987870 0.99988340 0.99988790
- - -·'"-
3.7 0.99989220 0.99989640 0.99990040 0.99990430 I o.99990800 I (L99991160 0.99991500 0.99991840 0.99992160 0.99992470
3.8 0.99992770 0.99993050 0.99993330 0.99993590 0.99993850 0.99994090 0.99994330 0.99994560 0.99994780 0.99994990
3.9 0.99995190 0.99995390 0.99995570 0.99995750 0.99995930 0.99996090 0.99996250 0.99996410 0.99996550 0.99996700
4.0 0.99996830 0.99996960 0.99997090 0.99997210 I o.99997330 0.99997440 0.99997550 0.99997650 0.99997750 0.99997840
4.1 0.99997930 0.99998020 0.99998110 0.99998190 i 0.99998260 0.99998340 0.99998410 0.99998480 1 0.99998540 0.99998610
4.2 0.99998670 0.99998720 0.99998780 0.99998830 i 0.99998880 0.99998930 0.99998980 0.99999020 0.99999070 0.99999110
4.3 0.99999150 0.99999180 0.99999220 0.99999250 0.99999290 0.99999320 0.99999350 0.99999380 0.99999410 0.99999430
4.4 0.99999460 0.99999480 0.99999510 0.99999530 l 0.99999550 I ri.99999570 0.99999590 0.99999610 0.99999630 0.99999640

4.5 0.9999966023 0.9999967586 0.9999969080 0.999997050X 0.9999971873 0.9999973177 0.9999974423 0.99999756!4 0.9999976751 0.9999977838
4.6 0.9999978875 0.9999979867 0.99999808 J 3 0.9999981717 . 0.9999982580 0.9999983403 0.9999984190 0.9999984940 0.9999985656 0.9999986340
--
4.7 0.9999986992 0.9999987614 0.9999988208 0.9999988774 . 0.9999989314 0.9999989829 0.9999990320 0.9999990789 0.9999991235 0.9999991661
4.8 0.9999992067 0.9999992453 0.9999992822 0.9999993 I 73 0.9999993508 0.9999993827 0.999999413 I 0.9999994420 0.9999994696 0.9999994958
4.9 0.9999995208 0.9999995446 0.999999567.l 0.9999995889 0.9999996094 0.9999996289 0.9999996475 0.9999996652 0.9999996821 0.9999996981
5.0 0.9999997133 0.9999997278 0.9999997416 0.9999997548 0.9999997672 0 9999997791 0.9999997904 0.999999801 l 0.9999998113 0.9999998210
5.1 0.9999998302 0.9999998389 0.9999998472 0.9999998551 0.9999998626 0.9999998698 0.9999998765 0.9999998830 0.9999998891 0.9999998949
5.2 0.9999999004 0.9999999056 0.9999999105 0.9999999152 0.9999999197 0.9999999240 0.9999999280 0.9999999318 0.9999999354 0.9999999388
I 5.3 0.9999999421 0.9999999452 0.9999999481 0.9999999509 0.9999999535 0.9999999560 0.9999999584 0.9999999606 0.9999999628 0.9999999648
5.4 0.9999999667 0.9999999685 0.9999999702 0.9999999718 0.9999999734 0.9999999748 0.9999999762 0.9999999775 0.9999999787 0.9999999799
5.5 0.9999999810 0.999999982 I 0.9999999831 0.9999999840 0.9999999849 0.9999999857 0.9999999865 0.9999999873 0.9999999880 0.9999999886
5.6 0.9999999893 0.9999999899 0.9999999905 0.9999999910 0.9999999915 0.9999999920 0.9999999924 0.9999999929 0,9999999933 0.9999999936
5.7 0.9999999940 0.9999999944 0.9999999947 0.9999999950 0.9999999953 0.9999999955 0.9999999958 0.9999999960 0. 9999999963 0.9999999965
5.8 0.9999999967 0.9999999969 0.9999999971 0.9999999972 0.9999999974 0.9999999975 0.9999999977 0. 9999999978 0.9999999979 0.9999999981
5.9 0.9999999982 0.9999999983 0.9999999984 0.9999999985 0.9999999986 0.9999999987 0.9999999987 0.9999999988 0.9999999989 0.9999999990
6.0 0.9999999990

The tabled values are 1 - Pz =the proportion of process output beyond a particular value "
of interest. (such as a specification limit) that is z standard deviation units a\vay 1i-on1 the OR
process average (for a process ihat is in statistical control and is normally disbibuted). For
example. if z = -2.17, Pz = 1 - 0.98499660 = 0.0150 or 1.5o/o. Jn any actual situation, this
c,_\ r-',
proportion is only approximate.

216
 Index

INDEX
American National Standards Committee Z-1, Median and Range Chart, 84, 85
211 MEWMA, 113, 116, 195
ASQ, 211, 213, 214 np chart, 183, 192, 206
ASQ Statistics Division, 211 p chart, 70, 183
ASTM, 181, 182, 211 Regression Chart, 118
Autocorrelation, 159, 160, 191 Residuals Chart, 118, 120
Average (See also Mean), 43, 60, 62, 63, 71, 76, Short Run Chart, 176
78, 79, 82, 83, 85, 87, 89, 93, 95, 97, 109, Stoplight Control Chart, 202
111, 116, 119, 191, 194, 195, 198, 213 u chart, 108, 183, 207
Average and Range Chart, 63, 78, 79 Zone Chart, 121
Average and Standard Deviation Chart, 82, 83 Control Limit, 30, 55, 56, 59, 61, 62, 64, 65, 69,
Average Run Length, 76, 111, 191 70, 80, 83, 85, 87, 90, 93, 95, 97, 181, 182,
Bhote, K.R, 104, 211 183, 193
Binomial Distrihution, 192 Control Statistic, 58, 59, 193
BisselJ, B.A.F., 139, 211 Convenience Sampling, 193, 199
Bothe, D., 145, 174, 179, 211 Correlation, 53, 193
Box, G.E.P., 115, 120, 141, 21 l Correlation Matrix, 193
Boyles, R.A., 139, 179, 211 Cox, D.R., 115, 141, 211
Brasc,211 Cui, H., 114, 212
Burr, LW., 114, 211 CUSUM, 109, 110, Ill, 112, 122, 194, 195
c chart, 183, 204 Davis, R.B., 123, 212
Capability, 19, 20, 128, 185, 211, 213, 214 Deming, W. Edwards, 17, 19, 29, 57, 171, 174,
Cause and Effect Diagram, 192 197, 212, 2l4
Centerline, 32, 48, 59, 80, 83, 85, 87, 90, 93, 95, Detection, 7, 194, 197
97, 181, 182, 183, 192 Dispersion, 194
Champ, C.W., 212, 213 Distribution, 192, 194, 196, 197
Chan, 114, 179, 212 Dixon, W.J., 182, 212
Characteristic, 151, 192 Doty, LA., 212
Charbonneau, H.C., 63, 176, 212 Davich, R.A., 139, 212
Cheng, S.W., 179, 212 Duncan, A.J., 63, 176, 212
Common Cause, 12, 192, 203 English, J.R.,, 212
Common Cause (See also Special Cause), 13 EWMA, 109, 111, 112, 174, 194, 195, 212
Confidence Interval, 192 Fair, D.C., 47, 109, 214
Consecutive, 192 Farnum, N.R., 109, 212
Control, 7, 9, 19, 20, 25-34, 37, 38, 41, 43, 45, Fellers, G., 213
47-74, 79, 80, 83, 85, 87, 89, 90, 93, 95,97, Freund, J.E., 211, 213
99-108, 113, 117, 118, 121, 128, 157, 176, Godfrey A.B., 63, 109, 192, 201, 213
177, 181-183, 188, 191-202, 211-214 Gordon, L W., 63, 212
Control Chart, 28, 29, 32, 37, 41, 45-55, 58, 59, Grant, E.L, 57, 63, 109, 176, 213
71, 72, 74, 79, 89, 99, JOO, 107, 108, 113, Gruska, G.F., 57, 102, 213
117, 121, 176, 177, 181-183, 191-196, 199, Gunter, B., 147, 213
200, 202, 211- 214 Haphazard Sampling, 194, 199, 200
Average and Range Chart, 63, 78, 79 Heaphy, M.S., 102, 213
Average and Standard Deviation Chart, 82, 83 Herman, J.T., 147, 213
c chart, 183, 204 Homer, A., 212
CUSUM, 109, 110, 111, 112, 122, 194, 195 Index (See Process Capabiltiy), 185, 211, 213
EWMA, 109, 111, 112, 174, 194, 195, 212 Individual, 86, 87, 89, 93, 95, 97, 110, 194
Individuals and Moving Range Chart, 87, 89, Individuals and Moving Range Chart, 87, 89,
174 174
MCUSUM, 113, 116, 195 Inherent Variation, 195, 203

217
lndex

Ishikawa, K, 61, 62, 63, 192, 213 135, 136, 147, 152, 153, 154, 162, 194, 198,
Jaehn, A.H., 213 201-203, 211- 214
Jenkins, G.M., 119, 120, 211 Process Average. 198
Johnson, N.L., 115, 141, 142, 213 Process Capability, 18, 19, 125, 131, 198, 211,
Juran, J., 17, 63, 109, 192, 201, 213 212, 214
Kane, V. E., 213 Variables Data Case, 198
Keats, J.B., 213 Process Control (See Statistical l)roccss
Kourti, T., 117, 213 Control), 1,4,8,9, 18, 19,25,29, 152, 198,
Lamberson, L.R., 213 201, 212, 213, 214
Leavenworth, RS, 57, 63, 109, 176, 213 Process Performance, 125, 131, 198
Lee, S., 212 Process Spread, 194, 198, 201
Location, 13, 194, 195 Quadratic, 199
Loss Function, 104, 148, 150, 151, 179, 195 Randomness, l 99
Lowry, C.A., 113, 213 Range, 31, 43, 60, 62, 72, 79, 85, 87, 158, 160,
MacGregor, J.F., 117, 213 164, 195, 199
Martin, T.W., v, 212 Rational Subgroup, 199
Mason, R.I., 117, 214 Regression Chart, 118
Massey, F ..I Jr., 182, 212 Reinsel, G.C., 120, 211
Mauch, P. D., 214 Residuals Chart, 118, 120
MCUSUM, 113, 116, 195 Reynolds, J.H, 121, 214
Mean (See also Average), 191, 195 Rigdon, S.E, 212, 213
Median, 84, 85, 182, 195 Roberts, S.W., 121, 214
Median and Range Chart, 84, 85 Run, 76, 107, 111, 191, 200, 212, 214
MEWMA, 113, 116, 195 Sample, 51, 52, 58, 85, 163, 168, 188, 200
Mirkhani, K., 213 Sampling
Mode, 195 Convenience Sampling, 193, 199
Montgomery, D.C.,47,57, 109, 110, Ill, 113, Haphazard Sampling, 194, 199, 200
117, 118, 121, 192, 201, 213, 214 Probability Sampling, 198
Moving Range, 43, 86, 87, 89, 107, l 10, 160, Random Sampling, 198, 199
174, 195 Rational Subgroup, 199
Multivariate Distribution, 140, 144 Scherkenbach, W.W., 153, 214
Nonconforming Units, 196 Shape, 13, 200
Nonconformity, 196 Shcwhart, Walter A., 19, 29, 30, 31, 76, 109,
Non-Normal Chart, 113 111, 113, 114, 115, 122, 123, 196, 200, 203,
Non-Normal Distribution, 140, 142, 196 214
Normal Distribution, 140, 142, 196 Short Run Chart, 176
np chart, 183, 192, 206 Sigma (CT), 200
Operational Definition, 197
Ott, E.R., 63, 214 Special Cause (See also Common Cause), 12,
p chart, 70, 183 13,60,62, 75, 171, 200, 203
Pareto Chart, I 97 Specification, 67, 188, 200, 202
Perfonnance, 9, 128, 212 Bilateral, 132
Pham, H, 114, 214 Unilateral, 137
Point Estimate, 197 Spiring, F.A., 127, 179, 212, 214
Poisson Distribution, 197 Spread (See also Variation), 13, 127, 198, 201
Prediction Interval, I 97 Stability, 201
Prevention, 7, I 94, 197, 213 Stable Process, 201
Probability based charts, IOI, 198 Standard Deviation, 79, 83, 85, 87, 160, 201
Probability Sampling, I 98 Statistic, 58, 59, 193, 201, 214
Problem Solving, 198 Statistical Control, 20, 55, 60, 193, 201
Process, 1, 4, 8, 9, 18, 19, 21, 24, 25, 26, 29, 31, Statistical Inference, 201
33, 34, 53, 67, 103, 107, 125, 127, 131, 132, Statistical Process Control, i, 4, 198, 201, 212,
213, 214

218
 Index

Statistical Tolerance Limits, 20 I, 202 Variation, 12, 13, 67, 83, 130, 131, 190, 192,
Stoplight Control Chart, 202 193, 195, 202, 203
Subgroup, 48, 55, 57, 58, 79, 83, 85, 130, 181, Inherent Variation, 195, 203
182, 188, 195, 199, 200, 202 Inherent Variation:, 203
Tilmon, C., 212 Total Process Variation:, 203
Tolerance (See Specification), 104, 201, 202 Wadsworth, H.M.,, 214
Total Process Variation, 131, 202, 203 Whecler,D.J.,47,63,89, 107, Ill, 117, 121,
Type I Error, 202 134, 145, 161, 174, 214
Type 11 Error, 202 Williams, F.J., 211, 213
u chart, 108, 183, 207 Wisc, S.A., 47, 109, 214
Unimodal, 202 Woodall, W.11, 212, 213
Variables Data (See also Attribute Data), 44, Young, J.C., 117, 214
125, 191, 198, 202 Zone Analysis, 203
Zone Chart, 121

219
Index

This page intentionally left blank

220
 Fccc\hack

S.P.C. Manual User Feedback Process

Consistent with the concept of continual lmprovement, this automotive industry Statistical Process
Control (SPC) manual is being subjected to a formal periodic review/revision process. In line with the
concept of custo1ner satisfaction, this review \.vi!J entail consideration of not only any applicable vehicle
manufacturer requirement changes from year to year but also of feedback from users of the manual for the
purpose of 1naking it more value-added and effective to the auton1otive industry and user co1111nunities.
Accordingly, please feel free to offer, in writing, your feedback comments, both pro and con, relative to
the manual's understandability, "user-friendliness," etc., in the area indicated below. Please indicate
specific manual page numbers where appropriate. Forward your feedback to the address indicated below:

Your Name - - - -

Representing
Company/Division Name

Address " ... · · - - - -.. -···-·--------·-·-·----......- - - - - - -

Phone_(_ _)
Please list your top three automotive customers and their locations.
---- ----·--------
Customer Location

Customer Location

Customer Location

Feedback Comments (attach additional sheets 1f needed)

_________ _______ ,_,,

Send Comments To:

Automotive Industry Action Group
Suite 200 SPC, 2nd Edition
26200 Lahser Road
Southfield, Michigan 48034

Please access www.aiaq.org to submit your feedback electronically.

221
•

CJS-9000